JP2019030763A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a further suitable game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: performance execution means which executes a performance; and performance variable means which allows the performance execution means to execute a specific performance, when an operation action is detected by detection means capable of detecting the operation action of a player in a non-contact manner. The detection means has at least a first detection area in which the operation action can be detected and a second detection area including a shared detection area being a part of the first detection area. A position can be varied between a prohibition position in which forming the shared detection area is prohibited and a permission position in which forming the shared detection area is permitted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down is provided with a start opening through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period.

JP 2009-219617 A

However, in this type of pachinko machine, a more suitable game has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a more suitable game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an effect execution means for executing an effect, a detection means capable of detecting a player's operation operation in a non-contact manner, and the operation by the detection means. An effect variable means for causing the effect executing means to execute a specific effect when an action is detected, and the detecting means detects a first detection area capable of detecting the operation action and the first detection area. At least a second detection area including a shared detection area, and a prohibited position for prohibiting the formation of the shared detection area, and an allowed position for allowing the shared detection area to be formed. A variable member that can be changed to variable, a variable control means that variably controls the variable member to the prohibition position and the permission position, and the detection by either the first detection area or the second detection area Detected by means Determining means for determining whether the variable member is variable at the prohibited position, and the effect changing means is configured to determine the first detection area and the second detection area by the determining means. Based on the discrimination result detected by either of the above, the corresponding specific effects are varied.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, the gaming machine has display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, and the variable member is variable on the front side of the display area of the display means. The detection means has the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein when the variable member is in the permitted position, the effect executing means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area. And when the said variable member exists in the said prohibition position, a 2nd effect is displayed on the position corresponding to a said 1st detection area and a said 2nd detection area, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of detecting a player's operation operation in a non-contact manner, and the operation means detected by the detecting means. In this case, there is an effect variable means for causing the effect execution means to execute a specific effect, and the detection means is a first detection area in which the operation operation can be detected and a part of the first detection area. At least a second detection area including a shared detection area, and changing between a prohibited position where the shared detection area is prohibited and a permitted position where the shared detection area is allowed to be formed A variable member that can be detected, a variable control unit that variably controls the variable member to the prohibited position and the permitted position, and whether the first detection region or the second detection region is detected by the detection unit. Determine And when the variable member is changed to the prohibited position, the effect changing means is either the first detection area or the second detection area by the determination means. On the basis of the discrimination result detected in the above, the corresponding specific effects are varied. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable game can be provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has a display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, the variable member is arranged to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the detection means is the display The first detection area and the second detection area are provided on the front side of the display area of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier to understand can be performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the effect execution means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is at the permission position, and when the variable member is at the prohibited position, A second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to each of the first detection area and the second detection area. Therefore, there is an effect that the effective detection area can be easily informed to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotary body lifting / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st rotary body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a front view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st member. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st member. It is a front view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central idler unit disposed at the lowered position. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central idler unit disposed at the lowered position. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, and (c) is an XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41 (b). It is a cross-sectional back view of the center floating unit and left-right rotation unit in a line. (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLIIb-XLIIb line | wire of Fig.42 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of Fig.43 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left-right sensor device taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLVb-XLVb line | wire of Fig.45 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the plate glass of a glass unit. (A) is a side view of the container in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow XLVIIb direction view of Fig.47 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. (A) is a side view of the container in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow LIb direction view of Fig.51 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a), and (c) is FIG. 56 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left and right rotating unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left and right rotating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows a frame button typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows a selection switch typically. It is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the display screen in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in a 1st control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first per-random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the first per-count counter CS2 and the jackpot type It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 and the determination value per normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of departure (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of departure (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table A in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table B in a 1st control example. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table C in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fish notice selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the shaking motion table in a 1st control example. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the volume setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the left-right selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the shake control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation control processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special SW effect control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the content of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part of. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the reel control processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 3rd control example. It is a timing chart which showed the timing which performs time production in the example of the 3rd control. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in period A1 of FIG. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production | presentation screen displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the period B of FIG. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production screen of the shaking production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) shows typically the content of RAM of the main controller in a 3rd control example. It is a figure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the rotary body operation | movement table in a 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the dog breed selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the figure which showed typically the shaking operation | movement table 2 in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect change process at the time of winning performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch reel display effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the shaking control process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the reel scenario table in a 3rd control example.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a third winning port 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the third winning port 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball has won the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball has won the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means a game state in which a ball is likely to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time to be changed is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are in an opened state (open state), the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are closed (closed state). Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, it becomes easier to win the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  Note that the opening time of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or changed during the probability change or in the short time. In addition to changing the time, it is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time as compared with normal time. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened for the first time or per time. The number of times of opening the electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82 may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal case.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B triggered by any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 (starting winning). While synchronizing, the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage as a trigger.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central idler unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so that they are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Accordingly, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the probability of hitting is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a per hit, When the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the short time, the time required to display the variation of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls to be retained for the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. A third winning opening 82 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second prize opening switch is turned on. Accordingly, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a big win lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first winning slot 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second winning slot 640 and the third winning slot 82 are as follows. Different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82 May be configured as five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, 1 The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the second winning combination 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, 2 The electric accessory 82a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 during the probability change or the shorter time than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 is a high probability even in a low probability state. The situation is the same. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball hits the first prize slot 64 when the ball wins the second prize slot 640 and the third prize slot 82. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. A ball is fired so as to pass the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning port 64 without an electric accessory (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning port 64 It is advantageous for a player to obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities and aim to win a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the second through gate 67 makes it easy for the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 to be in an open state, and wins the third winning opening 82. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the third prize opening 82 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the second through gate 67 is passed It is advantageous for the player to place the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and aim for a 15R probability variation big hit by winning the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  In addition to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may be selected by a lottery for a symbol different from the second symbol when a ball passes. By the lottery of the symbol, the second electric combination 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the balls passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric combination that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 and opened. Will be selected one by one.

  Thus, for example, if the second electric combination 82a is opened when a winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn, When winning is selected for the two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is selected and the second symbol When winning is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, a gaming state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened can be obtained.

  Therefore, if the gaming state is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the probability change, and the gaming state is easy to hit a symbol different from the second symbol during the short time, the second through gate 67 is hit right during the probability changing. The game state is such that the second electric combination 82a is opened by allowing the ball to pass and the ball is easy to win, and during the time, the left electric strike is passed through the first through gate 66 and the first electric combination is released to win the ball. It is possible to make it easy to play. For this reason, the game state during normal, short time, and probability change can be changed to different game states, so that the player can entertain each game state.

  In addition, when the second electric combination 82a is opened when the winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is selected and a winning symbol is selected for a symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released, and when the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is displayed. Is selected, and when the winning pattern is selected for the second symbol, a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened can be made.

  In this case, regardless of whether the probability is changing or when the time is short, when the player hits right and the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the first electric combination is released, and the gaming state is such that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. When the ball is left-handed and the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter the third winning port 82 can be achieved. Therefore, the player needs to change how to strike from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game because the player can change the way to hit at any time.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 64, and the third winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (variation time) is obtained. After the elapse, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes a switch (sensor) for detecting the winning of the ball at each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that the ball has passed through various gates, and a switch (sensor) for detecting fraud. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a group of switches (sensors) used for various effects and various variable members (movable accessories). These are connected to various switches comprising a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the operation, motors comprising drive motors 420, 530, 630, etc. for driving various variable members (movable accessories). The other device 228 includes a drive motor.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  7 shows a state in which the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is placed in the lowered position, the central idler unit 400 is in the raised position, and the left / right rotary unit 500 is in the retracted position. In FIG. A state in which the unit 300 is disposed at the raised position, the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, and the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the rotary body lifting unit 300 and the central idler are provided above and below the inner space of the back case 210. Each unit 400 is disposed, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and left and right sensor devices 600 are disposed on the left and right sides of the central floating unit 400.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) box-shaped housings 330 arranged in the width direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) each housed in each of the housings 330. ) Rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be movable up and down independently in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Is done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the housing 330, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let In addition, the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are formed as a columnar body of a cross-sectional triangle, and a different figure is each drawn on three surfaces of an outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotator 340a and the second rotator are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

  The central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 that are pivotally supported by the base body 410 so that the base end side is rotatable, and a distal end side opposite to the base end side of the pair of arm bodies 430. The first member 440 is connected to each other so as to be relatively displaceable (see FIG. 23).

  The pair of arm bodies 430 are respectively driven by separate drive motors 450 and formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. Thus, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear lift along the vertical direction, but also in a mode combining a linear motion and a rotational motion, and can be lifted up and down while incorporating the motion, The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). Details will be described later.

  The left and right rotating unit 500 includes a base (a rear base 511 and a front base 512) disposed on the front surfaces of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body lifting unit 300 and the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410. The base end side is provided with the displacement member 530 pivotally supported rotatably (refer FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and an overhang position (see FIG. 7) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacement member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position, so that the displacement member 530 is in contact with the first member 440 so that its movement can be restricted (see FIG. 41). Details will be described later.

  The left / right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 is formed.

  The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotary body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210. The In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward. Accordingly, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edges of the openings (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be made difficult.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 46, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central idler unit 400, the left and right rotating unit 500, and the left and right sensor device 600 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22, a detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300 </ b> C for elevating and lowering the central container 330, and a left unit 300 </ b> L and a right unit 300 </ b> R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is overlaid on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300 </ b> C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The disposed drive motor 320, the housing 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340 a and the first rotating body 340 housed in the housing 330. The two-rotary body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposed surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300 </ b> C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate member, the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side, and the housing 330 is disposed on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts project from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting member 325 (rack gear 324) is arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As the rack gear 324 moves linearly, the housing 330 is displaced (moved up and down) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically long portion where the container 330 is disposed with the horizontally long portion between the lower ends thereof. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, even when the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position with the left container 330 disposed at the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide comprising a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a slide body formed so as to be slidable along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. The slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail and the second rail, the first rail fixed to the back surface base 311, the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and both of them. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism comprising an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left container 330 is arranged in parallel to the side of the central container 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 12). ) Longer dimensions. Furthermore, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is disposed on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the central container 330 by restricting the shaking in the left-right direction by the extended slide guide 352. On the other hand, in a state where the central container 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300 </ b> L includes a rear base 313 that is formed in a vertically long front view and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 </ b> C. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 Is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 fixed coaxially to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack that is geared on the side surface of a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, the intermediate base 314 is provided with a shaft support hole, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole so as to be rotatable.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. The guide plate 353 is provided with a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-like opening, extending in the vertical direction. In this guide groove 353a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is interposed via a collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 becomes the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As a result of the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (lifted / lowered) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shape on the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the back and forth base 316 and the front base 317 are raised and lowered by the driving force of the drive motor 320. Housing 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. A transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a plate-like member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 is formed as a rack whose side surfaces are chopped, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . The front base 316 is provided with a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, extending in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is colored in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316 a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324 is performed. Accordingly, the housing 330 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, the rack gears 323 are provided at positions close to the side surfaces of the left housing 330 and the right housing 330, so that the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The horizontal dimension) can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the posture of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (left and right direction and difficult to shake).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and guidance by the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the guide plate 353 or the back base 316 is provided. Can sufficiently stabilize the posture. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. 18A and 18B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331 are formed, and these portions 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (FIG. 18B, the back side of the paper), the top surface, and the bottom surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the housing 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. Are integrally formed. A reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and has a size that protrudes at least in the vertical direction from both of the rotary bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-like members that form the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 in a non-rotatable manner. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which the axial cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface thereof is a shape obtained by removing one of the circles by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-like member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. The partition wall 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

  The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the container 330, and is formed in a front-view frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The container 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b that are rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 320, and a drive. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 that is meshed with the drive gear 351, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355. The gear train which consists of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b is demonstrated. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  In addition, since the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are substantially the same structures except the point from which the figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface differs, below, the 1st rotary body 340a is a typical example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 that are rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and the pair of end face plates 342a. Three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) provided between the end face plates 342 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and shaft portions 341b provided continuously at both axial ends of the body portion 341a. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  The shaft portion 341b has a shape obtained by removing one of the circular straight cross-sectional shapes of the circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder with a plane). The shape is slightly similar to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333. Therefore, the shaft 341b is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333, so that the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the container 330 (side walls 332 and 333) in a non-rotatable manner.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held unrotatable, the trunk portion 341b changes the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing 330 (decorative body 335). Are disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate disposed on the front surface (a “visual position” described later) of the container 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  The fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having both ends opened in the axial direction. Therefore, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed using such an internal space, and the wiring is pivoted. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the end in the direction. In addition, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot be rotated with respect to the housing 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, the fixed shaft 341 has a body 341b having a larger diameter than the shaft 341a. Therefore, the end plate 342 is disposed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 to be described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Note that the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 to the second rotating body 340b, but mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively. It spans between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end face plates 342.

  Each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C has a figure drawn on the outer surface thereof. Therefore, when the triangular prismatic body is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as described later, each display board 343A can be used even when there is a shift of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the graphic drawn on the outer surface of ˜343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, when the fixed shaft 341 is viewed in the axial direction, the end portions in the width direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape protruding outward, A central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). Is set to:

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “viewing position”, and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position at which a graphic drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “shielding position”.

  Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prism is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position, and the second display board 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are disposed at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transmissive portions PN capable of transmitting light. Is formed in part. In addition, a reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position where the inner surface of the display panel disposed at the visual recognition position among the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in the state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directly visible to the player through the transmission part PN of each of the display boards 343B and 343C. Can be made.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected on the reflection portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. And reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 of the container 330, and reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 is reflected by the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the first display panel 343A is arranged at the viewing position, and the LED 344 emits light, so that the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C arrange | positioned at the position (shielding position) which cannot be visually recognized from the player can be made to associate. Thereby, a player can be expected or suggested that the 1st rotary body 340a rotates to the position where the figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C becomes visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section. Therefore, when each of the rotators 340a and 340b is rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (display panels 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (FIG. 18 (b) vertical distance), or The apparent diameter (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) of each rotator 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotator 340a, 340b is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN is reflected on the player who visually recognizes the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base body 441. The mode (for example, the size of the region where light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  Returning to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 and having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 including a detection plate 363a that projects outward in the direction is provided, and a sensor device 364 that detects the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 in a state where a detection region is disposed on the movement locus of the detection plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detected object of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b through the transmission mechanism, and both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the 2nd rotary body 340b rotates in the same direction as the 1st rotary body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the number of combinations of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by one drive motor, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display board 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two-rotary body 340a is arranged at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotary body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotary body 340a are at the display position. There were only three combinations of the second combination to be arranged, the third combination of the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are independently rotated by different drive motors, up to nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations Can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts is increased by the amount of two drive motors required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to one, and the combinations are Can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations can be quickly displayed by not requiring a perfect match between the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display board 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the sign “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is disposed on the display position is indicated by a symbol “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position is indicated by a reference symbol “C” or “C ′”. Is done.

  For example, in FIG. 10 "A, C '" indicates that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotator 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions, respectively. The figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343 </ b> A to the third display plate 343 </ b> C of the first rotating body 340 a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values for the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 that are fixed to each other. In this embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. To be formed.

  No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 20). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the two rotating bodies 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the second display boards of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the graphics drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so that a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C in front view It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  No. in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 2 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is disposed at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotational angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player recognizes a graphic shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 9 and the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body The rotation position 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to recognize a graphic shift (no combination is established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed at the viewing position. No. 20 No. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display panel 343C at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section in which the figure shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is combined in the third combination.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described mode (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21A of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22E of FIG. 20). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 11-No. 20 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′, B "), the fifth combination (No. 12" B ', C "in Fig. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in Fig. 20).

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. 30 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′, FIG. C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the 1st rotary body 340a and the rotation period of the 2nd rotary body 340b can be varied. As a result, even if only one drive motor 350 is used, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

  In addition, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced and the durability and reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, the table in FIG. 20 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), and sections (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which a graphic shift (combination of combinations) is formed. Then, after the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears or just before it appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby producing an effect of causing the player to expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination appears in addition to the table in FIG. 20 in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). To the 9th combination. That is, in the former case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a needs to be repeated 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed once. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, in the case of setting to “1 / integer” times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can do. However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”), and the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, the number of figures that can be combined is nine. This means that the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotator 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotator 340b cannot be achieved simply by forming it as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, it is at the rotational position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing the difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of the presentation effect by the increase in the number of figures which can be combined, the required number of the drive motor 350 can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, combinations of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that cause a difference (shift) in a predetermined rotation angle at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C” and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotator 340b is delayed, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, the rotation is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b so as to be inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B” and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20), As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b so as to be inconspicuous.

  As described above, the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is formed such that each of the storage bodies 300 can be moved up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by being positioned on the back of the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b can be quickly displayed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b comparatively much, and time increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to positions that cannot be seen from the player. Can do. Accordingly, the rotation position of the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotation position without being recognized by the player, as a result. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can appear.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position to the descending position of each container 300 only when rotating the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b with a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not disposed at the lowered position, While the rotation of the rotators 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotators 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotary bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at positions that are not visible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the advance rotation at the lowered position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed when a predetermined operation means is operated. Thereby, it can suppress that the player recognizes the advance rotation of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the rotator is moved to the lowered position and cannot be seen by the player, There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, the payout apparatus 133, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, or the ball | bowl launching unit 112a (all refer FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated, for example. In a state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the ball payout, the sound output, or the ball launch. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. You may make it perform prior rotation. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is disposed on the base body 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210 and on the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 that are rotatably supported between the opposing surfaces of the cover body 420 and the base body 410, and arranged in a posture facing the distal end side, and these It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are coupled so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

  The base body 410 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and cover bodies 420 are partially disposed (covered) at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are respectively recessed at the positions where they are coaxial. Established.

  In addition, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 453 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is projected from the front surface of the base body 410. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. .

  A cutout 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 so that a space for allowing the arm body 430 to rotate is secured. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 at a predetermined angle or more can be regulated by bringing the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430. Formed. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to exhibit a function as a stopper that restricts the rotation of the arm member 420 by a predetermined angle or more.

  A rotating body 413 is disposed in the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotating body 413 is a member formed so as to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor (not shown). When the first member 440 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 31A), the first member 440 When the first member 440 is placed in the lowered position while being shielded and not visible to the player (FIG. 31 (c)), the game is placed vertically above the first member 440. It is possible to see from the person.

  The arm body 430 is a long rod-like body that is formed by bending in a generally letter shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotation shaft 431 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and protrudes coaxially from the front surface and the back surface of the base body side of the arm body 430. Is done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the tip end side is moved up and down around the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center.

  The driven groove 432 is a part through which an eccentric pin 454 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted. Shape). As will be described later, as the crank gear 453 rotates, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432, so that the arm body 430 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431.

  The connection pin 433 is a rod-like body protruding from the front surface on the distal end side of the arm body 430 and is slidably inserted along a slide groove 441 a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. Via the connecting pin 433, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected so as to be relatively movable.

  Note that a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430, as will be described later. Is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming out of the sliding groove 441a. In addition, the arm body 430 is provided with a rotating body 434 in front of a position opposite to the driven groove 432 across the bent portion. The rotating body 434 is formed to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor 435 disposed on the back side of the arm body 430.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 positioned eccentric from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

  The mounting plate 451 is disposed in front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 protrudes from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by a retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove. Regulate exiting.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment) An eccentric pin 454 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced in the vertical direction in a front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed up or pushed down by the eccentric pin 454 that slides in the driven groove 432, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is connected to the arm body 430 so as to be relatively displaceable via the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independent of each other. By being rotated, as described later, it is allowed to move freely in a combination of linear motion and rotational motion (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, with reference to FIG.26 and FIG.27, the detailed structure of the 1st member 440 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatable on the base 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back surfaces of the base 441, and the back of the base 441, respectively. The disposed arm member 444, a drive motor 445 that generates a drive force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444 are mainly used. Prepare.

  The base body 441 is a member that forms a skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed in a circular plate shape in front view. A pair of sliding grooves 441 a are formed in the base body 441. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as an opening in the shape of a long hole in a front view extending in a straight line, and a pair is arranged non-parallel. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441 a are arranged in a reverse C shape in front view that is inclined upward from the center toward both ends in the front view of the base body 441.

  A cylindrical tube portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected on the back surface of the base body 441, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is provided to protrude. Is done.

  A connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connection pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 441b, the support area of the connection pin 433 can be expanded correspondingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. .

  The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed in a disk shape that has a circular shape in front view and has a predetermined thickness dimension that is substantially the same diameter as the base body 441. The front body 442 is formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in the present embodiment) are disposed inside the front body 442. Therefore, the light which permeate | transmitted the front and outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated toward the exterior from a front and an outer peripheral surface by light-emitting (lighting or blinking) a some light emission means. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize so that the whole (front surface and outer peripheral surface) of the front body 442 may emit light.

  The front body 442 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on the base body 441 after the connection pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base body 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base body 441 from the back side, and at least the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base body 441 is at least of the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is mounted (fastened and fixed), and this collar is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off the base 441.

  The arm member 444 is a long member that is longer than the diameter of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444 a is a hole that is supported by the shaft 441 a of the front body 441 and is formed at a position that is the center in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444 below the pivot support hole 444a ( It is formed as an opening having a long hole shape when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 444 is pivotally supported on a shaft 441a between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back surface body 443 in a posture in which both end portions project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23). As described above, the eccentric pin 446b is slid along the driven groove 444b in accordance with the rotation of the crank member 446, and thus is rotated about the shaft support hole 444b.

  The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotary body 446 a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445, and a rotation center (drive motor 445) of the rotary body 446 a. And an eccentric pin 446b positioned eccentric from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446 b protrudes from the front surface of the rotating body 446 a and is inserted into the driven groove 444 b of the arm member 444.

  When the rotary body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotary body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus with a predetermined radius. Thus, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the shaft support hole 444a is alternately rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment). The arm member 444 is rotated about the (axis 441c) as a rotation center (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the player can visually recognize the operation of the arm member 444 in such a manner that both end portions of the arm member 444 projecting from the both sides of the front body 442 are reciprocated up and down alternately. . Further, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, the reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 as will be described later. Thus, the player can visually recognize the movement of the front body 442 relative to each other.

  Next, the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pair of left and right rotating units 500 are disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 6), and the pair of left and right rotating units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for, it is formed with substantially the same configuration, so only one (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the left-right rotation unit 500. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged on the front surface of the front base 512, the front base 512 overlaid on the front side of the rear base 511 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front base 513. A cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 disposed on the back side of the back surface base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back surface base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520, And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

  On the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, shaft support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at the same positions. Established. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotation shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted, and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 described later of the transmission mechanism is inserted.

  The displacement member 530 is a member having a blade-like decoration on the front, and mainly includes a rotation shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft base holes 511a and 513a of the back surface base 511 and the cover body 513, and the front surface and the back surface on the base end side (the lower side in FIG. 29) of the displacement member 530. Are projected from the same axis. The displacement member 530 can rotate between the retracted position overlapping the front base 512 in the front view and the projecting position projecting toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210 with the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is rotatably supported, and is recessed at a position away from the rotating shaft 531 by a predetermined distance from the distal end side. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, whereby the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is engaged with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. A crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530 are mainly provided.

  The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is provided to project from the rotation center toward the front. The link member 550 is a rod-like body disposed between the opposed surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530, and a connecting hole 551 is recessed in the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. The connecting pin 552 protrudes from the front of the.

  The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported by the connection hole 551 of the link member 550 through the opening 512 b of the front base 512, and the connection pin 552 of the link member 550 is driven by the driven hole of the displacement member 530. 532 is rotatably supported. Thereby, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550, and a crank mechanism is comprised.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. Accordingly, the displacement member 530 is rotated between the above-described retracted position and the overhang position with the rotation shaft 431 as the rotation center (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the one positioned on the left side (left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front with respect to the pair of arm bodies 430, respectively. These are referred to as “left” arm body 430 and “right” arm body 430.

  FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 31 (a) is in a state of being placed in the raised position, and FIG. 31 (b) is a view of the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 31C corresponds to the state of being arranged in the lowered position.

  32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 32 (a) in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) in FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 32C corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG.

  32A to 32C correspond to cross-sectional views in which the back surface of the first member 440 is visually recognized by cutting along a plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. FIG. Further, the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, while the back body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are not illustrated. The same applies to FIG. 35, FIG. 36, FIG. 38, and FIG. 40, which will be described later, and will not be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing the tip end side (the connecting pin 433 side) upward. The first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are positioned in proximity to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as “outer terminal ends”) of the sliding grooves 441 a on the side close to the radially outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are driven to rotate from the state shown in FIGS. 31A and 32A and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is driven to the driven groove 432. The left and right arm bodies 430 are respectively pushed downward while sliding.

  As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Displaced. From this state, when each crank gear 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). Thus, the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (the connecting pin 433 side) downward. The first member 440 is positioned at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the rotating body 413 is exposed above the first member 440 so as to be visible to the player.

  The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are positioned in proximity to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as “inner terminal ends”) of the sliding grooves 441 a on the side close to the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In the present embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end in the lowered position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the raised position.

  Thus, as described later, when the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member 430 using the action of inertia and the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowered position is set. The relative displacement amount at can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are driven to rotate in the direction opposite to that described above from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), the rotation of each crank gear 453, As the eccentric pin 454 slides on the driven groove 432 and pushes the left and right arm bodies 430 upward, finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit 400 is placed in the raised position.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400, the 1st member 440 can be raised / lowered between a raise position and a downward position. However, the above-described operation described as an example of raising and lowering the first member 440 is such that the first member 440 moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. There is little change in movement.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the distal end sides (connection pins 433) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are the first ones. Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the mode of rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430. it can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) is in a state where it is disposed at the raised position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged at the lowered position. Each corresponds to a state.

  35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) 33 (a) to 33 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, respectively, and FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are the center in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Each corresponds to a sectional rear view of the idle unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven from the state in which the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, and the tip side The right arm body 430 is rotated in the direction of rotation in which the (connecting pin 433) moves downward (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as “downward rotation”).

  By the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, so that FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder.

  Here, the left arm body 430 in the stopped state (on the right side in FIG. 35A) is, as shown in FIG. 237A, between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a in the raised position. A predetermined gap is formed in the. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (inclined) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder (lowering the left shoulder in FIG. 35B), the sliding groove 441a to which the connection pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected. Is inclined more steeply, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged to allow the movement (falling) of the first member 440 by the action of gravity. .

  Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 is moved to a predetermined rotational position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotational position, the first member 440 is brought into the state shown in FIGS. 33B and 35B by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be arranged.

  That is, until the right arm body 430 reaches the predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 that has been driven by the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is moved to the right arm body 430 after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of following the downward rotation of the arm body 430, the arm body 430 can be rapidly displaced downward by a free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (b)) arm 430 slides. By further pushing down the moving groove 441a, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), it is possible to further change (tilt) the posture of the first member 40 to lower the right shoulder to a steep angle. .

  In this case, the arm body 430 on the left (right side in FIG. 35B) is in a stopped state, and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. The first member 440 can be rotated with the right side in (b) as the center of rotation. As the right arm body 430 is rotated downward, the first member 440 is viewed from the left arm body 430 side (when viewed from the front). The state pushed into the left side of FIG. 33 can be formed.

  That is, in the process from the raised position in FIG. 33A to the state shown in FIG. 33C, the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational motion in the direction of descending to the right (FIG. 33 clockwise), and a linear motion to the left (left direction in FIG. 33) can be displaced by Can change the movement.

  When the state shown in FIG. 33C and FIG. 35C is reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left arm body 430 (left side in FIG. 33 (c)) is then rotated downward.

  Due to the downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, so that FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from the right-down shoulder posture to the horizontal posture.

  In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is further moved downward from the state shown in FIGS. 34A and 36A to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 (the right side in FIG. 36A) pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, which is contrary to the case described above (see FIG. 33). As shown in b) and FIG. 36 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the left shoulder.

  When reaching the state shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted. From this state, Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34B) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the posture of lowering the left shoulder to the horizontal posture, and is disposed at the lowest position. Can do. That is, it is arranged at the lowered position.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the front end sides (connections) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently of each other, so that the first member 440 moves linearly. It is possible to give a movement that combines a rotational movement and a change in the movement.

  In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 have their base end sides (rotating shafts 431) rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and are rotated around the base end sides. Each of the front end sides (connection pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are slid and displaced linearly, it is possible to give the first member 440 a motion that combines a linear motion and a rotational motion in a more complicated manner. Can be given to that movement.

  Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged at the raised position or the lowered position is inertial with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. Relative displacement can be achieved by the action of inertia. The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement at the lowered position as an example.

  37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 37 (a) shows a state where the first member 440 is located at the center. In FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c), the state in which the first member 440 rolls from side to side from the state illustrated in FIG. 37 (a) is illustrated.

  38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) are the same as FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Each corresponds to a rear sectional view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged at the lowered position (reference position), the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected to the sliding grooves of the first member 440. It arrange | positions in the position which has a clearance gap between each of the outer terminal of 441a, and an inner terminal. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the gap described above.

  For example, when one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) at a predetermined speed and then stopped, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 A displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action). Can change the movement.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed in a straight line and are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, When the one member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (inertial action), a rotational component can be imparted to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolled) not only in a linear motion but also in a combination of a linear motion and a rotational motion. As a result, the first member 440 is changed into a motion. Can be given.

  Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a straight line, when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a due to the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430, resistance is reduced. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. Thereby, the displacement of the first member 440 accompanying the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially C shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 in the left and right is converged and stopped, the first state is maintained in the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, in the state where an effect by another unit or a display device is performed and the central idle unit 400 is retracted to the raised position and stands by, the first member 440 can be suppressed from rattling with respect to the arm body 430. . As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, when the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right by inertia (inertial action) after the arm body 430 is stopped, the first member maintains the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. However, a structure that only moves linearly (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be displaced independently) is impossible, and the left and right arm bodies 430 are independently displaced as in this embodiment. This is possible for the first time by making it possible. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member 440.

  That is, in the structure in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position (conventional product), even if the arm body is stopped, it acts on the first member as the arm stops. The inertial force to be generated cannot be a trigger for reciprocating (swaying) the first member from side to side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture, only one arm body 430 is displaced (rotated) while the other arm body 430 is stopped. Since the one member 440 can be arranged at the reference position (for example, the lowered position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force accompanying the stop of the other arm body 430 is reciprocated left and right (rolling). ). As a result, the first member 440 can be reliably reciprocated left and right, and the amplitude of the left and right reciprocation can be increased.

  Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) left and right with inertia (inertial action) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430. Other locations are possible as possible. That is, in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440, It may be the position of. Therefore, it is not limited to the ascending position or the descending position, and a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Next, an operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 left and right using the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 is moved to the left and right arm bodies 430 even after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 left and right due to the inertia (inertia action) described above converges. Can be reciprocated left and right without rotating.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 disposed at the lowered position. FIG. 39 (a) shows a state in which the first member 440 is located at the center. FIG. 39B and FIG. 39C show a state where the first member 440 is swayed from side to side from the state shown in FIG.

  40 (a) to 40 (c) are sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are shown in FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Each corresponds to a rear sectional view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being disposed at the lowered position (reference position), the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are, as described above, the first member 440. Each of the sliding grooves 441a is disposed at a position having a gap between the outer end and the inner end. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the gap described above.

  That is, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base 441, the first member 440 displaces (rotates) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the driving motor 445, and the reaction force is applied to the base 441. The connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a by the reaction force. As a result, even if the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolled).

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members As shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise from the front (clockwise) as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b) so that the reaction force acts. Thus, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, and the arm member 444 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c). Rotate around (clockwise).

  Thereby, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolling), and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the base body 441 and rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445, the first member 440 is not displaced by the arm member 444. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotation direction. As a result, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the shaft 441c of the base 441) is positioned at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430. It is possible to easily connect the force to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (the base body 441 and the front body 442).

  Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (rolls) by the reaction force during rotation of the arm member 444. However, as can be understood from the above configuration, It is also possible in position. That is, in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440, It may be the position of. Therefore, it is not limited to the ascending position or the descending position, and a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Here, a sensor device that detects the posture of the first member 440 may be provided, and control for changing the rotation state of the arm member 444 may be performed based on the detection result of the sensor device. Thereby, the movement of the 1st member 440 can be converged rapidly, or the 1st member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (roll).

  For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (sideways) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). When it is performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocation of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). Is applied in a direction to cancel the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

  Alternatively, from the state in which the movement of the first member 440 has converged and stopped, or the state in which the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolled) by inertia (inertial action), the first member 440 The base member 441 and the front body 442 are reciprocated or the arm member 444 is rotated so as to strengthen the reciprocation (the direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is amplified in the motion of the base 441 and the front body 442). Act on). Accordingly, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right, and a change can be imparted to the left and right reciprocation of the first member 440 according to the rotation state of the arm member 444.

  As the sensor, an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor (for example, a base member 441, a front body 442, a back body 443, etc.) that detects acceleration in three directions is provided in other parts of the first member 440 excluding the arm member 444. , Capacitance type, piezo type, etc.), distance sensors that detect the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440 (for example, a triangulation type, a time-of-flight type, etc.). The distance sensor is provided in at least two locations and configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

  Next, the cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41 (a) is a front view of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 taken along the line XLIc-XLIc in FIG.

  41 (a) to 41 (c) illustrate a state in which the central idle unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position and the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position. 41 (a) to 41 (c), the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding. Only the main components necessary for the description are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to abut against a pair of cylindrical portions 441b erected on the back surface of the base body 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be restricted.

  For example, when the central floating unit 400 placed at the raised position is placed at the lowered position by the downward rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430, the left and right turned unit 500 is placed at the extended position at the same time. By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right due to inertia (inertia action) as described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38). (Rolling) can be controlled.

  Alternatively, when the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is displaced (rotated), the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), so that the first reaction is caused by the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444. It is possible to restrict the members (base 441 and front body 442) from reciprocating left and right (rolling), whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be made visible to the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm is changed according to the disposition position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. A mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

  Next, the left / right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, with reference to FIG.42 and FIG.43, the relationship between the left-right sensor apparatus 600 and the center floating unit 400 is demonstrated.

  42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are the XLIIb-XLIIb line of FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of a). 42 shows a state in which the first member 440 is disposed in the raised position, and in FIG. 43, the first member 440 is disposed in the lowered position.

  42 and 43, only the rear case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, and other components are not shown. Is done. 42 and 43, the path of light irradiated from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated on the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by using two-dot chain lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45 to be described later, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left / right sensor device 600 detects a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16, and acquires the presence / absence (presence), position, operation direction, and operation speed thereof. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Established.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated on the plate glass 16a are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42A). (Left and right direction) The light emitting portion is disposed in an inclined posture inward so as to have an overlap at the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are placed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening portion (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening portion of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be arranged, and can be difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  In this case, it is the front of the glass plate 16a (FIG. 42 (a) front side of the paper, the lower side of FIG. 42 (b)), and obliquely forward of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting part). ), The light emitted from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the glass plate 16a is reflected by the player's fingers, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving unit. The presence of the person's finger is detected.

  The left and right sensor device 600 has the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides, and can perform detection at two positions in front of the glass sheet 16a (areas corresponding to the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of both the sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (which position is in front of the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2) and the operation direction (from the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). Direction or the opposite direction) or operation speed (speed when traversing between the irradiation areas S1 and S2) can be detected.

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor device 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) is set to overlap the movement region of the first member 440. Is done. In other words, the first member 440 is formed to be displaceable to a position that overlaps at least a part of the detection region of the left and right sensor device (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the glass sheet 16a).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the first member 440 is in front of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 43 (a) on the front side of FIG. 43, lower side of FIG. 43 (b)). , An area (hereinafter referred to as “detection area of the first sensor 610”) obliquely in front of the irradiation area S1 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) and the front of the plate glass 16a. Thus, it is displaced to a position that divides an area (hereinafter referred to as a “detection area of the second sensor 620”) obliquely forward of the irradiation area S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

  Thereby, in front of the plate glass 16a, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated. Therefore, it is reliably avoided that the second sensor 620 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the first sensor 610 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the second sensor 620, respectively. it can.

  Thus, for example, an effect that causes the player to select an alternative (for example, two positions on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions (corresponding to the detection area), and the player brings a finger close to one of the two areas (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Thus, when performing an effect of selecting one of them, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be increased.

  Further, as described above, the central floating unit 400 is formed such that the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 can be relatively displaced with respect to the first member 440 (base 441). Therefore, not only can the first member 440 be moved up and down linearly along the vertical direction, but the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right (see FIG. 39). Moreover, the stop position of the 1st member 440 can be biased to either one of the left-right direction (refer FIG.33 and FIG.34).

  Thereby, according to the movement (position) of the 1st member 440, the magnitude | size of at least one or both of the detection area of the 1st sensor 610 or the detection area of the 2nd sensor 620 can be changed. Thus, for example, the player moves his / her finger according to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and searches for the position (detection region) where the finger is detected. It can be performed.

  In addition, for example, the first member 440 may block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 or the detection area of the second sensor 620 so that the detection is impossible. In spite of the display instructing the player to select the selection target with fingers, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas and interferes with the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas, so that an instruction for prompting the player to select the other can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  44 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a).

  As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are disposed therein, and the plurality of light emitting means emit light (light on or turn off). By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface to the outside. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize so that the whole (front surface and outer peripheral surface) of the front body 442 may emit light.

  In this case, when light emitted from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident. Interference between the reflected light and the light emitted from the light emitting part occurs, and the light receiving part directly receives the incident light, thereby causing erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light irradiated to the outside from the front body 442 (particularly the outer peripheral surface) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position that can be shielded (a position that crosses a virtual line connecting the front body 442 and the sensors 610 and 620 (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B), hereinafter referred to as “shielding position”). Formed. Therefore, when the light emitting unit of the front body 442 emits light, the sensors 610 and 620 can be shielded from the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the displacement member 530 by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensors 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this manner, the displacement member 530 is also used as a means for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, so that the permanent shielding member can be used. Since it is not necessary to provide them, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, and accordingly, a space can be secured as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for displacement of other displacement members.

  Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and depending on the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed at the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevated position) of the first member 440.

  That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to correspond to the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for the arrangement of the shielding member. Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevating position) of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 can be reduced in size. Therefore, not only can the permanent shielding member be made unnecessary, but it is possible not only to achieve a reduction in component costs and a sufficient space, but also to reduce the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530.

  Next, the relationship between the left / right sensor device 600 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  45 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the left and right rotation unit 500 is formed such that the left and right displacement members 530 can be displaced (rotated) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). A sensor (not shown) for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are disposed at the retracted position and the extended position is provided. The left and right displaced members 530 are disposed between the retracted position and the extended position. Are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620, respectively.

  The left / right sensor device 600 is formed such that each sensor 610, 620 can independently detect that each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is disposed at an intermediate position (predetermined position). Accordingly, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the glass plate 16a and means for detecting the disposition of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position. It can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  It should be noted that the position where each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is detected by each sensor 610, 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be an overhang position instead of the intermediate position. Since it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the extended position, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method for detecting the dirt D of the glass sheet 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). In FIG. 46, the path of light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. 42A, the object F existing in the detection region of the first sensor 610 is contaminated with the dirt D attached to the irradiation region S1 (see FIG. 42A), respectively. It is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, when the object F (player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light is emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610. The light passes through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, then is reflected by the object F, and is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the forward path. Accordingly, the presence of the player's finger is detected by the first sensor 610.

  In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, It is possible to dispose each of the sensors 610, 620 from the player, with the opening interposed therebetween (see FIG. 6) deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position on the outer side in the width direction). It can be made difficult.

  However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46B, the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a become nearly parallel to each other). Therefore, if dirt D (for example, a greasy hand of a player's hand) adheres to the glass plate 16a, the dirt D causes light to be reflected in a direction different from the forward path, and the reflected light is reflected to the first sensor 610. The light receiving unit cannot receive light. Therefore, the first sensor 610 cannot detect the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are disposed in an inclined posture with the light emitting part and the light receiving part facing inward, so that the irradiation region S1 of the plate glass 16a is contaminated. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, and thereby the stain D on the irradiation region S1 on the plate glass 16a. The presence or absence of adhesion can be detected. In addition, the presence or absence of dirt D in the irradiation region S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 detects the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620.

  That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S1, and is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620. If not, it can be respectively determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610, dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S2, and the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 If no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation region S2.

  Here, the detection of the presence or absence of dirt D on the glass sheet 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is preferably performed in the process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since no player has entered the store, the object F (the player's finger) does not exist in front of the glass plate 16a (the detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, a distinction between the object F and the dirt D (for example, based on the difference between the path length when reflected by the object and the path length when reflected by the dirt D, a threshold is set for the time required from light emission to light reception. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of the dirt D on the plate glass 16a can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47A is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47A. Note that FIG. 47A corresponds to FIG. 47A and 47B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  In 1st Embodiment, when the drive motor 350 was rotationally driven, the case where the rotation was always transmitted by the transmission mechanism to the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b was demonstrated, However, Transmission in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The mechanism is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be intermittently transmitted to the second rotating body 340b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (d), the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is in mesh with the drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

  The first gear 2353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and other configurations are the same. Note that the number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 differs from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and the two gears (first side intermediate gear 2354a and second side intermediate gear 2354b) are axially moved (FIG. 47). (B) It is formed as an integrated member concentrically and integrated in the left-right direction).

  The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 2354 (the first intermediate gear 2354a and the second intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The The first side intermediate gear 2354a has 21 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as that of the first side intermediate gear 2354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is omitted. Specifically, the second-side intermediate gear 2354b includes a non-engagement region in which seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a remaining region of the non-engagement region (that is, 14 teeth around the second tooth). A meshing region that is a continuous region in the direction).

  In the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth are omitted (removed) and cannot be meshed with the teeth of the second gear 2355, so that the transmission of rotation from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is transmitted. Blocked. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, it is possible to mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, and rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

  In this case, the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth with respect to the first side intermediate gear 2354a in which the number of teeth is set to 21. Since the center angle is 120 degrees and the meshing area is an area corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, the center angle is 240 degrees.

  Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in a section corresponding to a non-engagement region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-engaged, and the second side intermediate gear 2354b and In the section corresponding to the start area where the second gear 2355 is engaged, the second gear 2355 is rotated. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. 49 (e) to 49 (e) are the same as FIG. In the state shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 9, respectively.

  48 to 50, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are used for the second rotation by using the symbols “A to C”. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a)), respectively. ) Is hereinafter referred to as “initial state”. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set to a boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (end of the meshing region, start of the non-meshing region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

  No. of FIG. 1 and FIG. 49A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 48). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, and the second display panel 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 2354 (the first gear). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the non-engagement region in the two-side intermediate gear 2354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49B, the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is disposed at the boundary position on the other side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the start end of the meshing region, the end of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  No. of FIG. 2 and FIG. 49B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the first half of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49C, the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  No. of FIG. 3 and FIG. 49 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the second half of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the second rotating body 340 b places the third display plate 343 </ b> C at the viewing position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. 4 and 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at one boundary position between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  Subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49A in FIG. 48 to the state shown in No. 3 and FIG. By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 4-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, it may be considered that the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49A to 49C is changed by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No in FIG. 48) is considered. .5 “C ′, B”) and the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 48).

  In addition, in FIG. 7-No. 9 may be replaced with a state where the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) is varied by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .7 “B ′, A”), the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48), and the ninth combination (No. 9 “C ′, C” in FIG. 48). be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears, No. 1 gear (intermediate gear 2354) meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) and transmits rotation, and the mating gear disengages from the mating gear and blocks rotation transmission. A non-engaged region is formed.

  Thereby, since the 2nd rotary body 340b can be temporarily stopped, rotating the 1st rotary body 340a, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective effect by rotating each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, and the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be released and restarted. The interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of figures of the second rotating body 340b can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears from the state where the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 48) is formed. 48, the table shown in FIG. 48 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 48) to display the eighth combination, and the table in FIG. 48 is advanced in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 48). Thus, the ninth combination can also appear.

  As a result, as in the former case, No. 4 in FIG. 7 to No. 8, with the second rotator 340 b stopped, only the first rotator 340 a is rotated to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48). (Ie, “B ′” is already appearing on one side and “A” is switched from “A” to “B” and “B ′, B” appears on the other side) and the latter As in the case of FIG. 9 to No. 8, both the first rotator 340 a and the second rotator 340 b are rotated so that the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears (that is, one of them). And the other graphic can be selected and executed in accordance with the game state.

  In the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed twice. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a non-engagement region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second intermediate gear 2354b), and the rotation and stop of the second rotator 340b are performed while the first rotator 340a is rotating. Are switched and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are respectively provided with the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C, and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees. The formation range (center angle) of the region is set to 120 degrees.

  Thereby, since the phase of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is not shifted, the table shown in FIG. 48 includes a combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b as an element. The length can be shortened (the number of table stages is reduced). Therefore, the rotation speed of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b required in order to make a desired figure combination appear can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required for making a desired figure combination appear.

  However, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set in a non-corresponding manner to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-engagement region is set to a range of the central angle of 108 degrees, as in the case of the first embodiment, a phase shift between the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of combinations (for example, 9 sets) of graphics, and it is also possible to form a state where the graphics are not combined, and to allow the player to visually recognize the displacement of the graphics (the combination is not established).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51A is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). 51A and 51B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where one non-engagement region and one engagement region are formed in the intermediate gear 2354 has been described. However, the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment includes a non-engagement region and a tooth. Two joint regions are formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51D, the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is engaged with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

  The first gear 3353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and the two gears (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) are axially moved (FIG. 51). (B) It is formed as an integrated member concentrically and integrated in the left-right direction).

  The first side intermediate gear 3354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 3353 over the entire circumference. Accordingly, while the first gear 3353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The The first side intermediate gear 3354a has 35 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as that of the first side intermediate gear 3354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is omitted. Specifically, the second intermediate gear 3354b includes a first non-engagement region X1 and a second non-engagement region X2, which are regions where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth. From the first meshing region Y1 that is located in one between the joint region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 and in which seven teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction, and the first toothing region Y1 The second meshing region Y2 is a region in which 14 phases are located in the circumferential direction and are located on the other side between the first meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees. And are formed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated by 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-engagement region X1 and the second non-engagement region X2, the first rotator 340a (first gear 3353) while the second rotator 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped. ) Can be rotated 120 degrees each.

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a table showing graphic combinations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 54A and 54B are the same as those shown in FIG. These correspond to the states shown as 5 and 6, respectively.

  52 to 54, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by the reference numerals "A to C", and the second rotation is performed. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, as in the case of the second embodiment, the initial state in the third embodiment is that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotator 340b are in the viewing position. Arranged. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first Of the non-engagement region X1) (see FIG. 51A).

  52 of FIG. 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. in FIG. 52). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 3354 (the first gear). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the first non-engagement region X1 in the two-side intermediate gear 3354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-engagement region X1 and the second engagement region Y2 (the start end of the second engagement region Y2 and the end of the first non-engagement region X1). Be placed.

  52 of FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (the first seven teeth of the 14 teeth).

  As a result, no. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52 of FIG. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (seven teeth in the latter half of the 14 teeth).

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the second rotating body 340 b places the third display plate 343 </ b> C at the viewing position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the start of the second non-meshing region). Is done.

  52 of FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the second non-engagement region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 5 and FIG. 54A, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-engagement region X2 and the first engagement region Y1 (the end of the second non-engagement region X, the first engagement). It is arranged at the start end of the region Y1.

  52 of FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (seven teeth).

  As a result, no. 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b places the first display plate 343A at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 6 and the state shown in FIG. 54B, the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 has a boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1). It is set to the end, the first end of the first non-engagement region X1 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Therefore, in the following, the aspect described above (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in No. 6 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 54 (b)) is substantially performed. The same aspect is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed in one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In the present embodiment, the number of stages in one cycle table is 15.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) has a meshing region (first and second meshing regions Y1, Y2) that meshes with the other gear (second gear 3355) and transmits rotation, and the other gear (second gear 3355). A non-engagement region (first and second non-engagement regions Y1, Y2) that forms non-engagement with the gear and blocks transmission of rotation is formed.

  Thereby, since the 2nd rotary body 340b can be temporarily stopped, rotating the 1st rotary body 340a, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective effect by rotating each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-engagement regions (first and second non-engagement regions X1, X2) that block transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. The toothed regions and the non-toothed regions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 4 to No. As shown by 7, the rotation of the second rotating body 340 b can be continuously stopped by two types of figures. Therefore, the expectation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be enhanced.

  In addition, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to No. By switching forward and reverse between 7 and 7, the rotational speeds of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be visually recognized by making the player different.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55A. FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). In FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only main components necessary for the description are illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described. However, the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are described. 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has sliding grooves 4439 formed in the respective distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and those A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted through the respective sliding grooves 4439 is provided so as to protrude from the back surface of the first member 4440.

  The sliding groove 4439 is formed as an opening having a long hole shape in a front view that extends linearly, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that can slide along the sliding groove 441a. Via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449, the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected so as to be relatively movable. Note that a collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a stopper.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400 in this embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are formed by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. Since the connecting pin 4449 protrudes from the first member 4440 and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm bodies 4430, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm body 4430, The direction (tilt angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

  That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). ), When the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolled) by the action of the reaction force generated (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially C shape, as described above, a rotation component can be applied, so the first member 440 is In addition to linear motion, the motion can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by a motion that combines rotational motion with linear motion.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (the opposing angle of the letter C) is adjusted. As a result, the aspect of the reciprocating motion of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

  For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (decreasing the opposing angle of the letter C), the rotational component is increased, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the opposing angle of the letter C), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of linear motion can be increased.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, so that no rotation component is generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. Can be reciprocated (rolled) only by linear motion. That is, a mode in which the first member 4440 moves horizontally in the left-right direction can be formed.

  As described above, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the aspect of the first member 4440 reciprocating left and right (including the rotational component and the rotational component). The first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base 441) cannot be achieved. This is possible for the first time by forming the sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member 4440.

  Next, the central idle unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are the central floating unit 400. 4 is a cross-sectional rear view of the left / right rotation unit 5500.

  Note that FIG. 56B and FIG. 57B correspond to FIG. 56 and 57, the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, and the main parts necessary for the description are omitted. Only the configuration is shown.

  The left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged at a lower position in the overhang position than the left / right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left and right rotation unit 5500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 (by the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 5500). The pair of cylindrical portions 441b standing on the back surface of the base body 441) can be pushed down.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position (one side is stretched). The first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (sideways) by repeating the operation of slightly retracting the other from the protruding position while being arranged at the extended position.

  In this case, the operation of disposing the left and right displacement members 530 alternately at the extended position, the operation of retreating from the extended position, and the operation of the first member 440 reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so as to be linked (synchronized) with each other. The first member 440 and the whole of the left and right displacement members 530 can be linked together to form a movement that swings up, down, left, and right, allowing the player to recognize a large movement with a sense of unity.

  Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 collides with the first member 440 (cylinder part 441b), and the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision, and predetermined. After the elapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the first member 440 may continue to reciprocate left and right (roll). The player can recognize the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 in the left and right directions.

  Thus, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved with respect to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the upward rotation or downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped. In addition to the form of reciprocating left and right, the form of reciprocating the first member 440 left and right using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without using the inertial force resulting from the displacement of the arm body 430 Can also be formed.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the three-surface graphics. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of display surfaces n of the first rotator 340a and the number of surfaces m of the second rotator 340b are determined. Different values may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b includes the driving gear 351, the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gear 355 are not limited thereto. , 2355, 3355 may be provided.

  For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, and 3355 are meshed with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354, and the second rotating body 340b. And a structure in which the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 is exemplified. According to such a structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the base body 331 is provided with the reflection portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion that forms the back surface of the container 330 (FIG. 18B). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the reflection part RF may be disposed in another part. As another part, it is a part of base 331, and the inner surface of the part which forms the upper surface or lower surface of container 330 is illustrated. Since each of these surfaces is a surface on which the outer peripheral surfaces (display panels 343A to 343C) face each other when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is sent to the player. It can be reflected so as to be visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflection is accompanied by the rotation. The gap between the inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the interval in the vertical direction in FIG. 18 (b)) can be increased and decreased. The opposing angle of each rotating body 340a, 340b with each display plate 343A to 343C with respect to each inner surface of the substrate 441 disposed can be changed. Thereby, the aspect of the reflected light can be changed with respect to the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN as the reflected light from the reflection part RF.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the rotation axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. It may be what you do. Thereby, for example, the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b can be displaced (moved) in directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, each of the display plates 344A to 344C is preferably formed on a square in front view. This is because when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are arranged side by side, it is possible to form a sense of unity of the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) disposed in one container 330 is two in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be three or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the base end side of the left and right arm bodies 430 is rotatably supported by the base body 410 in the central floating unit 400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed to be slidable with respect to the base body 410. Also by the slide displacement, the left and right arm bodies 430 can be independently displaced, so that the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of the above embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) or have inertial force. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 can be moved relative to each other. Another structure may be sufficient as the structure connected so that displacement is possible.

  As another structure, for example, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, rubber-like elastic body, urethane, metal coil spring / torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). In addition, a structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected to each other by a shaft and a shaft hole, and the relative displacement is performed by rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. A structure that allows the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 to be connected to each other by a spherical ball and a stud that is in spherical contact with the ball, and a structure that enables relative displacement by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. A structure in which the tip of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms, and relative displacement is possible by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a part or all of these are assembled. Align were structures, and the like are exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation method when the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position has been described. However, each of these operation methods is an example, and other operation methods can naturally be adopted. . Therefore, for example, a part of the operation method shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be replaced with another operation method.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the case where the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action) in the central floating unit 400, the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the first member 440 reciprocates left and right. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the reciprocation of the first member 440 is formed to the left and right without causing the player to recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocation due to inertia is performed. The player can be made aware that it is continuing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the arm member 444 has a bilaterally symmetric shape and the center of gravity position is located in the center in the left-right direction in the central floating unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The position of the center of gravity may be decentered to either one of the left and right directions. According to this, the reaction force applied to the base body 441 with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocation (rolling) of the first member 440 in the left and right directions can be increased and a change can be given.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500 and 5500, the displacement member 530 is brought into direct contact with the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441), thereby moving the first member 440. Although the case where the first member 440 is controlled or the first member 440 is caused to move is not limited to this, the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other. A similar operation may be performed.

  Specifically, a magnet is disposed on one of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and at the other end of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is disposed and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or iron member, so that the first member 440 moves. A structure that restricts the movement or causes the first member 440 to move is exemplified.

  According to this, since the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other and the two can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, damage due to collision can be suppressed. Note that when an iron member is disposed on the other of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. By balancing the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440, the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530, so that Keep in contact.

<About control configuration>
Next, a first control example of the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Regarding the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A shows the frame button 22 and the touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a pressing part that is pressed by the player, and is configured such that a limit-type switch is turned on when the pressing part is pressed downward by a predetermined amount. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and even at the next monitoring timing (after 2 ms) determined as “ON” from the “OFF” state. If it is determined “ON”, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is determined that the frame button 22 is erroneously pressed when the ON state is instantaneously caused by noise or the like. Further, when the frame button 22 is not continuously pressed, that is, the state is switched from the “ON” state to the “OFF” state, and it is determined that the frame button 22 is “OFF” at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is pressed. It is determined that is released.

  The touch switch 290 is disposed close to the frame button 22 and the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor unit arranged on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The touch switch 290 is configured to turn on when infrared rays are radiated from the sensor unit and the infrared rays reflected by the object are identified. Yes. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing a hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. The operation of bringing a hand or the like closer to the sensor unit in order to turn on the touch switch 290 is referred to as operating the touch switch 290.

  Similarly to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 also monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at a predetermined interval (2 ms in this control example), and then changes from the state determined as “OFF” to the “ON” state. Then, when it is further determined “ON”, it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. A character “touch” is shown on the upper surface of the sensor portion of the touch switch 290 so that the player can easily understand that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

  FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22 and is configured by a push switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 includes an upper selection switch 291a configured with an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b configured with a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is used by being pressed by the player when mainly adjusting the volume. When the upper selection switch 291a is pressed, the volume is set to increase. In addition, the volume is set to be low by pressing the lower selection switch 291b. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

  On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol composed of characters and numbers, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol sequences are scrolled in the direction of the arrow X (from right to left) with periodicity and are displayed in a variable manner. In particular, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order, and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The left column part of this display area is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the upper symbol column Z1, the lower symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is done. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the middle line part of this display area is the effective line L2, the right line part is the effective line L3, and the diagonal line from the lower left to the upper right direction is the effective line L4. The diagonal lines from the upper left to the lower right constitute a total of five effective lines, including the effective line L5, and even if the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  Although omitted in FIG. 59, the display area of the third symbol display device is provided with a sub display area in addition to the display area (main display area) in which the above-described third symbol is displayed. The sub display area is horizontally long below the main display area, and is further equally divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area on the left is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not yet been executed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, and the other small areas. The area is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in a small area of the sub display area. In the small area, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one held ball number, and the number of held balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is four. Indicates a sphere. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  Further, in this control example, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed as a symbol with only a number attached to the symbol when super reach is reached, etc. There are cases where the display area is enlarged and the display area of the small display area disappears. By comprising in this way, a display mode with a fresh taste can be displayed to a player.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four areas is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, the color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left and right sensor device 600 when the left and right selection effect is executed. When the left / right selection effect is executed, first, the central floating unit 400 covers the common area where the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area (detection area) S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap. Descend.

  When the central floating unit 400 is lowered, the light emitted from the left and right sensor device 600 is shielded by the lowered central floating unit 400, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. Thereby, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the location where the central floating unit 400 is lowered is excluded from the detection region of the left and right sensor device, and the irradiation region (detection region) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 The irradiation area (detection area) is divided.

  The contents to be selected by the player are displayed in the display areas corresponding to the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 thus divided (in FIG. 60, the sunset background and the irradiation area are displayed in the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1). A starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). By configuring in this way, the player can view the display contents displayed in the display area and make an arbitrary selection simply by touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. Further, the region where the irradiation region S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation region S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the region near the overlapping region are excluded from the irradiation region of the left and right sensor device 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely divided, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the player's finger.

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 of this control example and the lowering control of the central idle unit 400, when an effect that only detects whether or not the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, Since the left and right sensor device 600 is provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect the player's fingers in a wide area. When the player performs an effect of selecting either left or right, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the player's finger. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early by constructing a detection situation suitable for each effect for a plurality of effects for detecting the player's fingers.

  In the present control example, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to realize the left / right selection effect by dividing the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1, S2 of the left / right sensor device 600, but left / right using other configurations. You may comprise so that selection production | presentation is realizable. Another example in which the left / right selection effect can be realized will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60B is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect in another example is executed. In this example, when the left / right selection process is executed, first, the central floating unit 400 is lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, information is acquired from an acceleration sensor provided in the central idle unit 400, and position information of the central idle unit 400 is calculated.

  Based on the calculated position information, a predetermined display area that is not covered by the central floating unit 400 is set as the left / right selection display area among the display areas of the third symbol display device 81, Display the selection screen. Next, the left and right selection device 600 is varied so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 overlap the left and right selection screen.

  According to the configuration of another example described above, the left / right selection displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the movement of the variable member (central floating unit 400) covering the display region of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left / right sensor device 600 can be changed, there is an effect that the player's selection operation in the left / right selection effect can be reliably detected.

  In this example, the configuration in which the position of the variable member is calculated using an acceleration sensor is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the time effect period (mode C) will be described. When 55 minutes have passed since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an effect that can be interacted with the dog and the touch switch 290 as a contact time is displayed as a 5-minute time effect period (mode C). A display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode (see FIG. 59) displayed in the normal performance period (mode A) is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 61 and displayed. The main display area in which the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed at the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, in the lower left display area, an effect that prompts the player to operate the touch center 290 so as to display an effect of calling the dog nearby (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog) is displayed. The characters “call” are displayed, and the player is informed that an effect of calling this dog is displayed when the touch switch 290 is operated.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a “stroking effect” mode as a contact effect. In the “stroking effect”, a user approaches his / her hand to a distance at which the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and rotates the frame button 22 to turn on (operate) the touch switch 290. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, a pattern imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed so as to stroke the dog's head, and the dog is variably displayed with a happy expression.

  By doing so, the movement of the player's hand is as if stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he is stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed on the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking action, and on the right side of the display screen according to the result of the lottery The displayed indicator rises.

  The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the fish school reliability until the next time effect period (the effect period based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292) arrives. That is, the contact effect executed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating the touch switch 290 many times during the contact effect, the fish school reliability is maintained until the next time effect period. It can be set to increase the degree.

  By configuring in this way, the player can change the reliability of the production by his own operation, so he can actively participate in the game and can be prevented from getting bored with the game. It becomes.

  In this control example, the “stroking effect” has been described as the contact effect. However, a plurality of contact effect contents may be provided. In the case of providing a plurality of effects, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator is lowered if the indicator has a high rate of increase but is operated by mistake, so that the player can select game characteristics. As such an effect, for example, a “brushing effect” can be considered. In the “brushing effect”, an indicator can be greatly raised by brushing the displayed torso of the dog well, and the indicator can be lowered if the dog's face is mistakenly brushed.

  Moreover, you may provide the effect that an indicator falls, when a player performs a contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily perform setting such as intentionally lowering the fish school reliability and increasing the appearance frequency.

  Further, a plurality of types of dogs may be prepared, and depending on the type of dog, the state of raising the indicator and the types of effects that can be set may be changed. In the case of preparing a plurality of types of dogs, for example, the types of dogs appearing on the basis of a plurality of missions and game contents in a normal period may be changed. By configuring in this way, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact effect, the games in the normal period are concentrated and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game.

  In addition, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating around the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms when operated quickly. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set most easily. Therefore, a player who is operating the touch switch 290 quickly with a correct operation can give more benefits. In addition, this “stroking effect” is configured so that the level of the indicator does not rise for a player who keeps the touch switch 290 on for a long time, that is, a player who just holds his hand over the touch switch 290. did. Thereby, it can be urged to play a game with a correct operation.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an example of a “contact effect” end screen. It is informed that the reliability of the school of fish has reached 70% by the operation of the touch switch 290 in the “contact time” (see FIG. 62A) which is the “contact effect”. In addition, when the determination result is a big hit holding result among the determination results stored on hold at the end of the “contact time”, the game result of the “contact time” is ignored and the “fish school reliability is 100”. % "May be displayed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to keep the player interested until the end of the production, and it is possible to suppress boredom with the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the display mode of the volume setting during the variable display will be described. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variation display. In this control example, the volume can be set based on the player's operation as long as the reach is established even if the 3rd symbol display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is being executed. It is configured as follows.

  When the frame button 22 is operated while the variation display of the third symbol is being executed, the volume setting screen is displayed above the variation screen of the third symbol. By operating the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is adjusted. On the volume setting screen, the current volume level, the text “Volume is being set” indicating that the volume can be set, and a mark for prompting to operate the operation switch 291 are displayed.

  In this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 has not been operated for a predetermined time when the 3rd pattern being changed is in the reach state or after the volume setting is enabled (after the volume setting screen is displayed). Or when the operation for completing the volume setting is performed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the volume can be set during the variation display of the third symbol, so that the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (listening to the game volume). it can. As a result, it is possible to adjust the sound volume when the third symbol is not fluctuating, and to reduce the inconvenience that the game sound volume becomes unexpected when the fluctuating display of the third symbol is started.

  In this control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen, but in addition to this, the currently output game volume with respect to the maximum value of the game volume output by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. You may display the volume value which a player can grasp | ascertain relatively. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the volume based on the currently output game volume and the volume value, and further reduce the problem of unexpected game volume being output during the game. Is possible.

  Moreover, when using such a structure, it is good to display so that a player can grasp | ascertain the maximum value of the game volume in the variation display currently performed. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound is generated in the current variation display, and the volume can be adjusted in advance. Further, by displaying the maximum value of the game volume in the currently executed variable display, the player can predict the result of the determination of success / failure, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the result of the determination of success / failure is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With this configuration, it is possible to give a change based on the game result to a normally performed volume adjustment operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  63 shows the volume setting screen when the third symbol is changing, the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed when the state where the third symbol is not changing continues for a predetermined time. Even when a standby screen (demo screen) is displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the demonstration screen was displayed, or when a predetermined operation is performed during the demonstration screen, the volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81, etc. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Are used, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a composed of four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing special symbol reservation balls. There is an area. In each area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a special symbol having a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (special symbol). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66 (a)) for a special symbol with a high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66 (a)) for a special symbol with a low probability are as follows. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this control example, two types of jackpot types, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are set, and either the “big hit A” or “big hit B” is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is stored in the special symbol big-random number table for the low probability. Stored. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first jackpot type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” is “jackpot A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Note that the random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)), This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Next, a mechanism will be described in which the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern, and the sound lamp control device 113 determines a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. In the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, a variation pattern selection table for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol is set as shown in FIGS.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the time data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal time of 54 minutes is measured. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set after the preparation period. The Although details of each period will be described later, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected by the different period varies depending on the set period. Is set. Here, even if a different effect is set, the effect is composed of the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the change time of each effect, the determination result, whether or not there is a rough change. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, main controller 110 does not need to determine individual variation patterns, and can reduce control addition. Further, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can also be suppressed.

  A variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol for which variation starts and the current presentation mode. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is a rough type and variation time of the variation pattern. Various variations of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as variation patterns to be selected when the common determination result of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is big hit. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and the determination result is correct, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern that becomes “super reach” is set more easily than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the determination result is a win, the frequency of the “super reach” variation pattern is executed and the number of jackpots increases. It is easy to have expectations.

  It should be noted that the normal reach jackpot variation pattern, which is a jackpot variation pattern of “normal reach”, reaches the middle symbol row Z2 for a predetermined time through a reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. This is a variable display mode in which the display is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode after being displayed. The variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot is composed of a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of the “super reach” jackpot described later.

  Super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, as in the case of normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and then the characters are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of “super reach” is configured with a variation time relatively longer than the variation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is out, as a variation pattern for removal, “displace for a short time (for short time)”, “disengage for a long time (for short time)” "," Reach out of normal reach ", and" out of super reach ". The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, is composed of a fluctuation time (7000 ms) shorter than the other fluctuation patterns, and is displayed in the main symbol for a predetermined time without being displayed in the reach display mode. Is displayed in a variable manner, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, is configured with a fluctuation time (10000 ms) longer than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach loss variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal reach loss”, is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern in that the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the reach display pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constituted lottery result is out of place. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the determination result is unacceptable. Moreover, the super reach loss variation pattern that is “super reach loss” is a display mode that is different from the various super reach jackpot variation patterns in that it is finally displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss.

  In addition, when the determination result of the special symbol is unacceptable, the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 Alternatively, the variation type counter CS1 may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratios are different.

  For example, in the case where the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the variation pattern of “displacement for a short time” and may be selected. As a result, when the number of reserves is 0 to 2, the variation time of the selected variation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy to make the game ball enter the first winning port 64, and the variation of the special symbol Can be prevented from occurring during the period in which the game is stopped (the period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, it is preferable to set a larger ratio of selecting the variation pattern of “short time out”. As a result, when the number of reserves is close to the upper limit number of 3 to 4, it is easy to select a short variation pattern. The malfunction which becomes can be suppressed.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the winning random number set by the normal hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Further, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) is used for the normal symbol when the probability is low (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability that the normal symbol is hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol type and the long time type are set as the normal symbol type, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is activated in the opening state in 0.2 seconds is 1 Per run. Further, during the time shortening and the probability variation period, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a normal symbol low probability, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and a second symbol display device (not shown). In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As shown in FIG. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the first electric combination 640a is released “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time” as normal. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. Further, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is “21 to 204”, the first electric accessory 640a is opened “1 second × 2 times” per long time.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” much shorter than that when the normal symbol has a low probability, and is further attached to the second prize opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric combination 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 84), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 83) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. , An hour / medium counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a has one execution area for special symbols and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order from the smallest area. That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable symbol display (third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the first winning opening 64 (start winning). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed in step 1). The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 77 and S405 in FIG. 79). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the number of held balls (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 or 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to an initial value of zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 81). S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203e.

  The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to ON when the gaming state is probability change.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol holding lamp (not shown), and a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the 65a opening and closing plate as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected via an input / output port 205. For these, various commands and control signals are transmitted.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, touch switch 290, selection switch 291 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a SW notice selection table 222b, a fish school selection table 222c, and a shaking operation table 222d. Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223g, input time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation degree storage area 223m, effect mode storage area 223n, At least a standby flag 223o, a touch effect effective time storage area 223q, an interval counter 223r, a volume setting storage area 223s, a volume setting flag 223t, a separation flag 223u, an operating flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z are provided. .

  The winning information storage area 223a is an area in which winning information is stored in correspondence with the holding ball based on a winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various kinds of information such as a determination result, a variation pattern, a stop type, and the like are set.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area for storing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol based on the reserved ball command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the hold ball command.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating a stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of variation patterns, various lotteries, and the like. This effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is normal. The time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is set to ON when it is determined that it is within three years from the time of manufacture, and is set OFF when it is determined that three years have passed.

  The input time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the set period of the time effect period based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292. In the input time storage area 223, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 86, S1212) in the start-up process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. In S1224, information of the time effect period is set for 24 hours.

  The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period is started. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a preparation period, and is set to OFF when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a time effect period. Is done.

  The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. The start period flag 223i2 is turned on when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a time effect period, and is turned off when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 has passed the time effect period. Is set.

  The SW effective time storage area 223j is an area for storing the SW operation effective time. In this SW effective time storage area 223j, the stored effective time is subtracted or reset in the SW effect control process (FIG. 97, S2202).

  The level storage area 223k is an area for storing upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the touch effect effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The expectation degree storage area 223m is an area for storing an expectation degree based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). .

  The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information regarding the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set). If the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode A is stored. If the current production mode is the time production period, the production mode B is stored. Mode C is stored.

  The standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog is waiting during the time effect period (in effect mode C) during the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to ON when a contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and then set to OFF by turning on the touch switch 290.

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the touch effect effective time. This touch effect effective time storage area 223q is subtracted from the stored effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated, and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

  The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314).

  The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used for the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to ON when the volume setting is possible (FIG. 93, S1905), and is set to OFF when the volume setting is completed. .

  The separation flag 223u is a flag used for the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), and is set to ON when the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (FIG. 94, S2004). When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

  The in-operation flag 223v is a flag used in the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined as the accessory driving start timing (FIG. 95, S2103). Is set to OFF when the process ends (FIG. 95, S2111).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 88) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination processing The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table 222c in the present control example. Here, the fish school notice selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of touch sensor control processing (FIG. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described in FIG. It is a table.

  By using this table, the notice effect is controlled so that the fish school notice appears with the expectation corresponding to the reliability (expectation) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62B). In this control example, the fish school notice selection table 222c is used. However, when a plurality of effects in which the degree of expectation is set according to the contact time (time effect) is provided, a table is provided to correspond to each effect.

  Further, in the fish school notice selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), it is set so that the fish notice will not appear when the degree of expectation is 0%. For example, the fish notice will appear only when the determination result is wrong. You may set to do. By configuring in this way, a player who wants a fish school notice regardless of the result of the determination of the success / failure gets bored early in the game because he / she participates in the production to intentionally lower the expectation during the contact time (time production). It becomes possible to suppress that.

  FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking motion table 222d in the first control example. This shaking motion table 222d is a table that is referred to when executing S2108 of shaking control processing (FIG. 95, S1316) described later.

  Here, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation state of the arm member 444 is configured to be grasped by information from an acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

  In the present control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the arm member 444 with reference to the swing operation table 222d. Is determined. Specifically, when the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444 is increased, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation is set. If the information of the acceleration sensor is data during right rotation, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation is set.

  That is, since the drive motor 445 is driven and controlled based on the actual rotation status by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation status) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the rotation of the drive motor 445 is controlled. Force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  In particular, in the variable member configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member, such as the arm member 444, and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state on the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end of the variable member and to drive and control the drive motor 445 based on information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  71 (b) shows only the operation table for increasing the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444. However, the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. An operation table may be provided. In this case, for example, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation is set, and the operation table for rotating the drive motor 445 may be used. With this configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the driving force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be efficiently reduced.

  Furthermore, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 in accordance with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm What is necessary is just to comprise so that rotation of the member 444) may be controlled. Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when it is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, and the worst. When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 stops).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the rotation status of the variable member based on the player's operation, and to increase the effects that the player participates in, so it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game Become.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b 111 performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads / writes data to / from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs known data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first winning opening 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a winning ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 performs voice lamp control. When the character design is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but is preliminarily stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read out, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the first electric combination 640a is opened as a normal symbol jackpot, and the ball is As it becomes easier to enter the 2-winning entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. The drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described instead. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 73). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 74 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 74).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as with the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 102B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 102 (b) S3209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 109B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 75), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 102 (b) )), The pointer update process (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 75), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 102 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3707 in FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 84. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67. Through-gate passage processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is obtained. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the held ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to execute determination of whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of one random number counter and determination of the type of jackpot. In this case, for example, the total number of random values is set to 3000, and a random number counter is used for loop counting. By providing six random numbers corresponding to the jackpot A and four random numbers corresponding to the jackpot B in the total number of 3000 random numbers, it is possible to realize the same sort as in this control example. By doing so, there is an effect that one counter can be reduced.

  In this control example, when the big hit is A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit is B, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot type out of two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type Is a big hit B, 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). Thereafter, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability variation period (S213). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), then a stop command is set (S300), and the process is terminated.

  In this control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the next jackpot game is started by setting the probability variation flag 203f to ON and setting the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability that is a probability variation period. In the meantime, when the short-time game is played and the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the hour-count-medium counter 203e, but a jackpot type different from that may be provided. For example, a jackpot type that sets a gaming state with a high probability and does not provide a short-time game, a jackpot type that sets a gaming state with a high probability and sets the hour / counter counter 203e to 100, and a probability changing counter are newly provided, 100 is set for each of the probability changing counter and the hourly / shortest hour counter, and each lottery determines whether or not the big hit type that provides a high-probability and short-time game for a predetermined number of times (100 times) and whether the high-probability gaming state continues. The jackpot type to be determined can be considered. In this way, by using various jackpot types or combining them, it becomes possible to provide a variety of gaming properties to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of gaming properties.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time reduction counter 203e (S217), and the process proceeds to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is performed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits the same match, Judged to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbols jackpot (jackpot A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), “60 to If it is in the range of “99”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times for a short period of normal symbols).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the variation time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disconnection (for a short time)”, “disconnection normal reach”, and “discovery super reach” are defined as variation patterns for disengagement. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and stored in the execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 84). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  In this control example, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, but in addition to this, the variation type for each number of retained symbols stored in the special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a. A counter may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the number of reserved items and the variation type counter.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. That is, a winning is detected when a ball is detected three times (6 milliseconds) in the timer interruption process executed every 2 milliseconds. Note that, in the switch reading process S101, when it is configured to be able to determine the state in which the switch is continuously detected for a predetermined period, it is possible to eliminate the need to execute three timer interrupt processes in this process. .

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). And it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than an upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reservation ball number counter. One is added to the value (N1) of 203c (S404). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second winning opening 640 (S407). Here, the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

  Then, there is no winning at the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter One is added to the value (N2) of 203c (S410). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S411, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, prefetching is executed to set a winning command, and this process is terminated. Here, the prefetching executed in S413 will be described. Prefetching is based on game information stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) This is a pre-reading process for determining in advance a determination (presence / absence determination) executed at the start of fluctuation.

  In the prefetch process, a determination is made in advance based on the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, and the determination result is set as a winning command. This winning command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, as with other commands, and is output to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84). Is done.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs a predetermined notification to the player in advance using the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the stage before the fluctuation is started. Is possible.

  In this control example, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes a prefetch process, and the process result (determination result) is output to the voice lamp controller 113 as a winning command, but is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The stored game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or information corresponding to the game information is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The pre-reading process described above may be executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this way, the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and the second symbol variation display or second prize opening 640 performed in the second symbol display device (not shown). It is a process for controlling the opening time etc. of the 1st electrically-driven accessory 640a which accompanies. As described above, the control of the opening time of the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 is also performed at the same time, but the control content is the same as that of the first electric accessory 640a, and thus the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device is in the middle of the display indicating the hit, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour / short counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON. This is because in this control example, when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 and the probability variation flag 203f is not set to ON, the process proceeds to the process of S611. When the value is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the process proceeds to S609.

  In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 21-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls out The number of opening times and the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device starts the variation display being executed. Determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric combination 640a is set by the process of S625, the first electric combination opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, passage of a sphere in the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203d (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (usage areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets initial values (S914), and starts payout control of game balls. It becomes possible. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 76) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) and the start winning process (see FIG. 79) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the first electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. . The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S620 in FIG. 80 or the processing of S621 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. Note that the second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is also subjected to the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 78), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 78). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of a second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 80) (lighted display). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 82 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a use area that are backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initial setting process (see FIG. 83, S901). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85 to FIG. 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1320 (see FIG. 87) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), it executes a power-off process in S1320. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after an instantaneous power failure, and the power-off in S1320 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1320, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1320 is executed (see S1319 in FIG. 87). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1320 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211). Thereafter, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. (S1211). Thereafter, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1212, a time setting process is executed (S1212). The time setting process (S1212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and a process of setting the preparation period and the time effect period in the input time storage area 223h based on the time information is executed.

  In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. Note that the RTC 292 is a timing unit having a battery inside, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas, or to control to display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the term data (S1222). Here, the term data is set to three years within three and a half years which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC 292 in this control example. A date three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture is set as the time limit data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that a delay or the like occurs in time due to a lack of battery capacity or the like, and the start timing of the time effect cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223g described later is set to ON. When the voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined and the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. Also good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC 292 to a voltage value that allows the RTC 292 to operate normally.

  If it is determined in the process of S1222 that the acquired time information is outside the deadline data, that is, three years or more have elapsed (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the input time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in this control example, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 54 minutes from the predetermined time set in a state where the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the subsequent minute is the preparation period (effect mode B). ), 5 minutes after the lapse of the preparation period is set as the time effect period (effect mode C). After the time effect period of 5 minutes has elapsed, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and thereafter, each period is similarly set.

  In this control example, each period is set as described above, but when the first predetermined time is reached based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292, it corresponds to the normal game period (effect mode A). When the second predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed, and when the third predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed. It may be set in time series based on the time information. By doing in this way, even if an error occurs in the time to turn on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to perform the same effect at a predetermined time. . In addition, since the RTC 292 is used, there is no error in the time information (time information) to be measured even if the power-on time is deviated.

  The details of each of the above-described periods will be described later. In the normal game period and the time effect period, the type of the background image on which the displayed preview contents and special symbols are displayed is switched. In addition, the preparation period is a period for preparing to switch from the normal game period to the time effect period, and before changing to the time effect period, the change of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. It is set to be.

  In this control example, based on the acquired time information, a 24 hour preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the input time storage area 223h. It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, measure the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the passage of 54 minutes. In addition, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Further, the execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time effect period may be started based on the player performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing in this way, when friends play a game on the adjacent platform, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the predetermined operation described above. .

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the change display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 ends, a synchronized effect management process (S1313) is executed. Details of this synchronized effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. After this synchronized effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, a volume setting process is executed (S1314). Details of the volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1314 ends, a left / right selection process (S1315) is executed. The left / right selection process (S1315) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315) is executed, the shaking control process is executed (S1316). Details of the shaking control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1316 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1320). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). Details of this variation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, a notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). The advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the processing of S1404 is completed, processing according to other commands is executed (S1412), and this processing is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the variation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1403).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by one every time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (S1502).

  Here, the present control example is configured such that the production mode A, the production mode B, and the production mode C are set. Each production mode is configured to be set every time a predetermined time elapses after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and a game is started. For 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the production mode A is set as the normal game period, and after 54 minutes, the production mode B is set as the preparation period for the next 1 minute, and after 1 minute of the preparation period, Production mode C is set as a time production period for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of the time effect period has elapsed, effect mode A, which is a normal game period, is set again, and effect mode B and effect mode C are set repeatedly.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the same time by switching the effect mode every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. By doing so, the timing at which the effect mode is switched between the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be adjusted. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  If it is determined that the production mode A is set (that is, the normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or variation pattern selection table B Based on the determination result (see FIG. 69), the variation pattern is selected and set based on the determination result, the number of holds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1503), and this processing is terminated.

  In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the production mode A is not set (S1502: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) ( S1504), the process is terminated. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set, and characters “Soon contact time start !!” indicating that it is the preparation period are displayed on the background. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which the background image is counted down for 1 minute is executed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long the time production period starts later.

  Details will be described in a notice selection process (see FIG. 90) described later, but the notice effect is not set in the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time effect period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and the notice effect different from the dedicated notice effect set in the time effect period is displayed. Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, details of the notice selection process (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the notice selection process (S1404).

  In the notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). If the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this process ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON in order to prevent the notice effect from being set when it is determined that the preparation period is in a synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 92) described later.

  On the other hand, if the preparation period flag 223i1 is not set to ON in the process of S1601 (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the pattern is a super reach variation pattern (S1602). If it is not a super reach variation pattern (S1602: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (S1602: Yes), an effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). Thereafter, a preliminary lottery is executed based on the set expectation degree and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fish school notice is selected (S1605). When the fish school notice is not selected (S1605: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fish school notice is selected (S1605: Yes), a display command indicating the fish school notice is set (S1606), and this process ends. Note that the set expectation used in S1604 is set in S2332 of FIG. 99 to be described later, and details will be described later.

  Here, returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S1401 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412. Move on to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). If the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and set in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1409). After the process of S1409 is completed, the process proceeds to S1412. In the processing of S1408, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1410). When the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1412.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original value of each of the counters C1 to C2 is obtained from the original value separately from the big special lottery drawing of the special symbol. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1410, if a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process corresponding to the received command is executed ( S1412), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. Obtain (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. Further, the notice contents selected here are also notified.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. The display for acquiring and notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 as it is is set as the stop type of the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708). A stop type command for use is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1709 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the synchronous effect management process (S1313) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous production management process (S1313), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a preparation period or a time production period, and a production mode indicating it is set. Run.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1801). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after acquiring time information of “hour, minute” from the RTC 292 (S1802), is the start period flag 223i2 turned on? It is determined (S1803). When it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is OFF (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is a preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804). . If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), it is then determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805).

  If it is determined by the processing of S1805 that it is not the time effect period, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the processing of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to OFF ( Then, the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). Thereafter, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode C (time effect period) is set (S1809), and this process ends. In addition, the display control apparatus 114 performs the process which switches the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to the display mode corresponding to a time production period based on having received this command.

  Returning to S1804, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1804, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the processing of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the production mode B is set in the production mode storage area 223n (S1811). Thereafter, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode B (preparation period) is set (S1812), and this process ends. In addition, the display control apparatus 114 performs the process which switches the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to a preparation period based on having received this command.

  Also, in the preparation period, a special background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters “Soon contact time starts !!” indicating that it is the preparation period are displayed on the background. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which the background image is counted down for 1 minute is executed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long the time production period starts later.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1803 that the start period flag 223i2 is on (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). If it is determined that it is not outside the time effect period (S1813: No), this process ends. When it is determined that it is outside the time effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to OFF (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying display control device 114 that it is effect mode A is set (S1816). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In addition, the display control apparatus 113 performs the process which switches the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to the display mode of a normal production period based on having received this command.

  Next, the volume setting process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the sound volume setting process (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player is executed.

  In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the production mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). If the effect mode is not mode A (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the production mode is mode A (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a reach establishment period (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period means that the combination of the third symbol that is a big hit in the state in which two symbol sequences are stopped and displayed among the three symbol sequences variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped. This is a period in which a state (reach state) in which there is a possibility of being displayed is established.

  If the determination result in S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), it is then determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). If the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is next determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 has not been operated (S1904: No), this process ends. If the selection switch 291 is operated (S1904: Yes), then the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), and a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906). Exit.

  If the volume setting flag 223t is on in the processing of S1903 (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is increased and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1908), and a display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This process ends.

  In the processing of S1907, when the upper selection switch 291a is not operated (S1907: No), it is then determined whether or not the lower selection switch 291 is operated (S1910). If the lower selection switch 291b has not been operated (S1910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the lower selection switch is operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1911), and a display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). The process ends.

  As described above, the sound volume setting process (S1314) is set to a specific period (effect mode A) even when the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In a state where the reach is not established), the operation means (selection switch 291) that can be operated by the player is enabled, and the sound volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can be set only in a state where the third symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (so-called demo screen display state or standby screen state). Can be set even when the third graphic is being displayed in a variable manner, and the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  Moreover, in this control example, when the production mode is set to other than A, the volume is not set. This is a mode in which an effect is executed based on time information acquired from the RTC 292, such as the effect mode B and the effect mode C, and control for synchronizing the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 may be performed. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronized effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 (for example, the volume of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is indicated that the car is approaching from a distance). This is because the effect balance is lost in the control effect).

  Although not shown, when the production mode is set to B or C, the output of the volume related to the synchronous production ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronous production. A predetermined volume level is output. With this configuration, even if different volume levels are set in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronized performance, and the player is interested in the performance. It becomes possible to have.

  Furthermore, the predetermined volume level output during the above-described synchronized performance is set to be lower than the volume level that is the reference value in the normal state (the volume is reduced). This is because the same sound is often output simultaneously from a plurality of pachinko machines 10 during the synchronized performance.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by a digital signal (a pattern in which the output volume is output to the speaker as a digital signal), the volume control related to the synchronized effect can be performed by the above-described control. In the case of control (a pattern for adjusting the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker by controlling the output section of the speaker), based on the set volume level so that the volume related to the synchronization effect becomes an appropriate volume. Thus, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to output a suitable sound volume regarding a synchronous production.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 performs control capable of outputting the sound output corresponding to the synchronized effect at an appropriate sound volume regardless of the set sound volume level, the effect mode is set. The volume may be set even when the state is not set to A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a more desired volume.

  In addition, this control example is configured so that the volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is because after the reach is established, the movable accessory provided on the game board 13 is driven, or the third symbol display device is producing an effect of expecting a big hit, This is because the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced and the pachinko machine 10 is executed as a whole so that the production can be enjoyed.

  In the present control example, the volume can be set while the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the volume setting can be used for game play. For example, if the lottery result is the 3rd symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is a big hit, and the volume setting is performed when the large volume effect that notifies the big hit is set at the end of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, It is conceivable that a notification such as “Because a loud sound is generated in the current fluctuation!” Is reported. By giving such a notification, it is possible to suggest a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display, and also to be used as a reference for setting the volume, and while the player enjoys the game, he can enjoy more than desired. It is possible to prevent in advance that a large volume of sound is generated. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent a sudden loud sound from being generated from the pachinko machine 10, even a person with a weak heart can play a game with peace of mind.

  Further, since the third figure is configured so that the volume can be set during the variable display, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the variable display. Therefore, as a result of setting the volume level during the display of the demonstration screen as in the prior art, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate the problem that the volume of the BGM during the fluctuation display becomes larger than expected and gives discomfort.

  Further, in this control example, only the volume setting process based on the player's operation is described, but the volume setting may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, operating hours (opening time and closing time) are input to the pachinko machine 10 by operating the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291. When the time information acquired from the RTC 292 reaches the closing time, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level, and when the time information acquired from the RTC 292 reaches the opening time, the volume level is reduced to a predetermined reference level or during the business hours of the previous day. It is better to automatically return to the set volume level. With this configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output by the pachinko machine 10 during maintenance work performed outside business hours, and to prevent the maintenance worker from feeling uncomfortable. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level during the time effect period that is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, and the result of the mini game executed during the time effect period or the time effect period is executed. The volume level may be controlled to increase based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, surrounding players will also pay attention to the pachinko machine 10 with a high volume during the time production period, and the player who is playing with the pachinko machine 10 with the increased volume has a sense of superiority. Can be soaked.

  Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to control the volume level to be increased based on the result of the prefetch process based on the winning command. By doing this, the game can be played in a state where the expectation for the big win is increased by grasping the change in the volume level before the display of the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is the big win is started. It is possible to focus on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the left / right selection process (S1315) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the left / right selection processing (S1315). This left / right selection process is a process that is executed when the player uses the left / right sensor device 600 (first sensor 610, second sensor 620) to produce an effect of allowing the player to select one of the alternatives (left / right) (FIG. 60).

  Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. The left / right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (presence), position, operation direction, and operation speed thereof. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a.

  The irradiation areas (detection areas) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so that they partially overlap each other as shown in the irradiation areas S1 and S2 in FIG. In this way, the presence of the player's fingers can be detected in a wide continuous area.

  In this control example, the irradiation region (detection region) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation region (detection region) is set in this way is divided into left and right by lowering the central play unit 400, and the player is An effect for selecting one of the choices is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for causing the player to select one of two alternatives is the left / right selection process.

  In the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), first, it is determined whether or not it is the left / right selection timing (S2001). This left / right selection timing is a case where the left / right selection effect is included in the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed is shown.

  If it is not the left / right selection timing in the process of S2001 (S2001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the left / right selection timing (S2001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). When the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), thereafter, the lowering of the central idle unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set to on (S2004), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2002, when the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), it is then determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). If the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the left selection is set (S2006), then the separation flag 223u is set to off (S2007), and this process ends. .

  In the process of S2005, when the left sensor is off (S2005: No), it is then determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, the common detection area is formed so that at least a part of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 overlap each other. Makes it possible to reliably detect the player's operation over a wide range by making the detection area formed continuously by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 into one detection area. In the case of performing an effect, at least the above-described shared detection area is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor device 600 by allowing a movable accessory (variable member) to enter between the glass plate 16a and the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are divided.

  With this configuration, when the player performs an effect game in which the player touches the glass plate 16a without changing the left and right sensor device 600 (or brings his fingers closer), a wide range of touch operations by the player is continuous. In the case of performing an effect game in which the player makes an alternative choice, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are separated, and the player It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

  In the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed, and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do it. In this way, the detection area can be moved.

  By configuring in this way, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the region not covered with the movable accessory in the third symbol display device 81. Can be used as a detection region of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Thereby, the display “touch” is performed in the display area not covered with the movable accessory, and the movable object is the third by making the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area the detection area of each sensor. Even in a situation where the display area of the symbol display device is covered, it is possible to inform the player of the detection area in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that the production can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 610 are operated by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 that can be operated by the player provided in the pachinko machine 10. A function capable of adjusting the detection region of the sensor 620 may be provided. By doing in this way, a player can perform an effect only by touching a desired position of the plate glass 16a.

  Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that the current detection region is unknown. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player hits the detection area of the first sensor 610.

  In the case of performing such an effect, it is preferable to touch the area of the second sensor 620 before touching the detection area of the first sensor 610. In addition, as a bonus, a special video or a privilege that can acquire a large amount of points accumulated by a player or information that can acquire a large amount of points can be considered. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect that the player can actually participate in, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by the player's fingers and reflected. It is configured to detect the player's finger by receiving the light at the light receiving unit, but other methods may be adopted as long as the sensor can detect the movement of the finger.

  For example, a plurality of sensing axes are formed in the detection area, and a human sensor that detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axis or a type of dielectric that has polarization is a focus. Electric current that is generated by receiving infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) emitted from the human body on the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body (current generated in accordance with a change in the charge state) A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects a finger on the basis thereof is conceivable.

  When a pyroelectric infrared sensor is used, it is preferable to mount the pyroelectric element on a dome-shaped lens in order to provide directivity in the detection direction. The pyroelectric element may be composed of an inorganic ceramic material (such as lead zirconate titanate (PZT)) or an organic material (such as polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film made of PVDF, it is possible to configure an infrared sensor as a flexible plastic film, and thus it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

  Further, by arranging a plurality of such elements, it is possible to detect the high-speed movement and movement direction of fingers, and it is also possible to detect gesture operations that move fingers. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect that the player can actually participate in, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. As other sensors, a non-contact photoelectric sensor, a capacitive proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the shake control process (S1316) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the shaking control process (S1316). This shaking control process is a process executed when the central floating unit 400 is shaken using the drive motor 450.

  Here, the variable control (operation control) of the variable member (central floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed of a stepping motor. A stepping motor rotates in steps of a certain angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with an input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (number of steps) and pulse speed (frequency). The rotation amount and rotation speed of the motor are controlled, and the variable member can be moved and controlled.

  And each variable member is comprised so that it may each change by receiving the drive of the transmission means (gear) interlock | cooperated with the rotational drive of the stepping motor mentioned above. The sound lamp control device 113 is provided with drive motor control means for outputting a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to the minimum unit in which the variable member is variable (unit in which the gear serving as the transmission means rotates by one tooth). It has been.

  First, the movable control of the arm body 430 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank gear 453 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The variable member mounted on the arm body 430 is configured to be variable based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). Based on the state in which the origin detection sensor detects the origin, the position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the number of rotations (number of steps) of the drive motor 450.

  Next, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). Note that an origin detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is mounted. The position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the rotational speed (number of steps) of the drive motor 445 with reference to the state where the limited detection sensor detects the origin.

  That is, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to operate in a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motor 450 (two pieces) and the drive motor 445, respectively (FIGS. 31, 33, and 33). 34, FIG. 37, and FIG. 39).

  Further, in this control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for a member configured to be variable, so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, the variable member can be controlled normally by comparing the position (assumed position) of the variable member calculated from the rotation speed (step number) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor. It is possible to determine whether it has been performed. If the assumed position and the current position are different, a movement failure due to the step-out of the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is considered.

  Returning to FIG. 95, the description will be continued. In the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101). This accessory driving start timing is when the effect of shaking the accessory is included in the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, it shows the timing at which the effect of shaking the accessory is executed. When it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the in-operation flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this process ends.

  In addition, although the figure demonstrates the case where the accessory driving start timing performed based on a fluctuation pattern is set, it can set an accessory driving start timing other than that, for example by operating the frame button 22 You may comprise as follows.

  If it is not the accessory driving start timing in the processing of S2101 (S2101: No), it is then determined whether the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104). If the in-operation flag 223v is off (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not the scenario is a shaking operation (S2106). If the scenario is a shaking motion (S2106: Yes), information on the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), shaking motion data is set from the shaking motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the information of the acceleration sensor is the left rotation data, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is the left rotation is set, and when the acceleration sensor information is the right rotation data, the arm member is set. Rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is right rotation is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, when it is not a scenario of shaking motion (S2106: No), this process is terminated. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether it is a scenario end (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a scenario end (S2109: Yes), the in-operation flag 223v is set to OFF (S2110), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, when the control of swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is determined based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444. Has been decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation state) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the drive motor 445 can be driven and controlled based on the actual rotation state. The rotational force of 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  In particular, in the variable member configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member, such as the arm member 444, and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state on the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end of the variable member and to drive and control the drive motor 445 based on information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  Note that the swing control of the variable member may be performed using the frame button 22. In this case, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 in accordance with the timing of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm The rotation of the member 444) is controlled. Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member, and the worst timing is detected. When the button is pressed, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 stops).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the rotation status of the variable member based on the player's operation, and to increase the effects that the player participates in, so it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 87, S1307), it is first determined whether or not the production mode is A (S2201). If it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), a SW effect control process described later is executed (S2202), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S2201: No), a special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the SW effect control process (S2202) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the SW effect control process (S2202). In the SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in a normal period (effect mode A) that is a period other than a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed is executed.

  In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether or not the SW valid time is longer than 0 (S2301). If the SW valid time is 0 (S2301: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S2301, if the SW effective time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is subtracted. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (the touch switch 290, the selection switch 291) is pressed (S2303). If the frame button 22 or the like has not been pressed (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected display advance command is set (S2304), and the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is reset ( In step S2305, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special SW effect control process (S2203) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this special SW effect control process (S2203). In the special SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed is executed.

  In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is in a standby state during the time effect period. That is, the standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect is selected in the time effect period. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

  If it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display status command indicating that the standby flag 223o is off is set (S2314). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2312, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2311 that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is longer than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and then this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 99, the touch sensor control process (S2316) which is one process in the special SW effect control process (see FIG. 98) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the touch sensor control process (S2316). In the touch sensor control process (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is turned on (S2322). When the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). Thereafter, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  If it is determined in step S2322 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328). ). When the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the level storage area 223k (S2329). Thereafter, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  In the processing of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). If the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), the expectation degree based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation degree storage area 223m (S2332). Thereafter, a display command indicating that the degree of expectation has been set is set (S2333), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (S2901 in FIG. 101). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3002 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. And after repeating several times including the process of S3002, you may make it perform the process of S3003-S3005.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2903, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2904). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2904, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 109A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that a power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn. Determination processing (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and simple display setting processing (see S3209 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), and the main control device gives an instruction to start the variation effect. 110, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the display is simplified. Fluctuation effects can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2905, interrupt permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 102B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 75) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S3201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3202), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3203), based on the content of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3206). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3205) are used. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3209) is executed, and the process of S3204 is performed. Migrate to

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S3202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 103, S3202), as shown in FIG. 103, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301). (S3301: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S3305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3403, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3406), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3405, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3402. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3304 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a display stop type command (S3306: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3307), and the process returns to S3301.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S3502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S3503).

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S3306 (S3306: No), it is then determined whether there is a display pending command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). If it is determined that the display hold command has been received (S3308: Yes), the hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbol is displayed or the color of the displayed reserved symbol is set to be variable. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display hold command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display notice command (S3310). If it is determined that there is a display notice command (S3310: Yes), notice display data based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed and display settings such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice are set. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S3310: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (S3312). If it is determined that there is a display state command (S3312: Yes), background display data corresponding to the state based on the command is set (S3313). Thereby, the display corresponding to time production etc. is set. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether there is a display touch command (S3314). If it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). Thereby, a display corresponding to a touch effect such as a contact effect is set. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3316), and if there is an error command (S3316). : Yes), an error command process is executed (S3318), and the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the error command process (S3318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3601). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3602). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3601, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3602 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3602, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3316 that there is no error command (S3316: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3317), and the processing returns to S3301.

  In the process of S3301 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes). ), The processing of S3302 to S3317 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3301 to S3307 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S3301 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)) are performed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3401. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, details of the display setting process (S3203) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S3702 to S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3701: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3702), and then S3703 to S3704. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3703). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3704).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3801).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to S3705.

  In S3705, pointer update processing is executed (S3705). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3901, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3903). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3905), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3903 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3906, the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3902: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3906 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3709).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3709: No), the confirmed display data table is not stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3710), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3714), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S3204), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop change determination flag set in S3715 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3716). If the demo display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3717), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3718). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3716, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3716: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 109A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4001, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). FIG. 109B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4101), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4101: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4102). In the process of S4102, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S 4102 (S 4102: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to S4103. Also, as a result of the process of S4101, if the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4103.

  In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4103). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206), and the image controller 237 is described in the drawing list. Based on the transferred data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4103 (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3705) of the display setting process (S3203) executed previously is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202). If it is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4203) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205.

  In the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4202: No), the process of S4203 and S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

  In the process of S4206, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S4206 (S4206: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Also, as a result of the process of S4205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4205: No), the process proceeds to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207). If the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so there is a transfer start flag. Is turned off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4207: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4212). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4212: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4213), the back image provided for each back image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4214). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the storage destination (normal) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4215), and the process proceeds to S4209.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S4209, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The determination in the processing of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4210). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206), and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4210, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described drawing process (S3206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In the second control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the first control example. The variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control process in addition to the process performed in the first control example described above, and the addition of the reel control process, and The difference is that a new process is added to the variable display setting process. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

  First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112A is an example showing a display mode in a state where the container 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. 112 (a), the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as the main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the container 330 and the first symbol A third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sub-third symbol) synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotor 340b is displayed at the same time. This display mode is executed by raising the container 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. Is the display mode.

  In this display mode, three main third symbols and three sub-third symbols are respectively displayed in the left-right direction, and the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed in correspondence with each other. That is, the main 3rd symbol in the left column (the symbol displaying 4 and 7) corresponds to the sub 3rd symbol in the left column (the symbol in which A and A 'are combined and displayed). The main 3rd symbol in the row (blank symbol) corresponds to the secondary 3rd symbol in the middle row (the symbol in which C and B 'are combined and displayed), and the main 3rd symbol in the right column (blank symbol). Corresponds to the sub third symbol (the symbol in which C and A ′ are combined and displayed) in the right column.

  The sub 3rd symbol has "A and A '", "B and B'" and "C and C '" as specific combinations, and all 3 sub 3rd symbols are "A and A'". When the composite display is made, it is informed that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, when all of the three sub-third symbols are combined and displayed as “B and B ′” or “C and C ′”, a notification is made to make the player expect a big hit, for example, “B and B”. It is configured to display “Cha N Su” by arranging three sub-third symbols that are combined and displayed with “′”.

  FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which the right and third right symbols are switched after FIG. 112 (a) is displayed. As shown in this figure, when displaying the main 3rd symbol and the sub 3rd symbol, the special symbol's success / failure judgment result is displayed by the combination of the respective symbols. If the judgment result is a big hit, the combination that gives a big hit for the special symbol success / failure judgment result (a combination of three shark / turtle symbols) is displayed in the main third symbol, and the special symbol is judged in the secondary third symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols combined and displayed by A and A ′ are arranged) is displayed.

  As described above, in this control example, in the normal gaming state, the determination result of the special symbol is determined using the third symbol that is variably displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When a transition is made to the reel mode, which is a gaming state different from the normal gaming state, a special combination is made by combining the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-described sub third symbol. It is configured to be able to notify the symbol determination result.

  Note that the above-described conditions for shifting to the reel mode include the case where the determination result of the special symbol is a predetermined determination result (big win), or the reel mode in the variation pattern command or winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113. Production information corresponding to may be included.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, a reel scenario table 222e is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart for the main process 2. Among the main processes 2, the processes of S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 of the main process (see FIG. 87) in the first control example, respectively. Since the process is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. The difference will be described below.

  The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330) which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). If the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). Thereafter, the setting start flag 223w is set to off (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to on (S2405), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the setting start flag 223w is off in the process of S2401 (S2401: No), it is then determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). If the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the data is end data (S2408). If it is end data (S2408: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not end data (S2408: No), operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart for the variation pattern selection process 2.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). If the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). If the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), the variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B and set (S1514). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. In the reel scenario table, a table that is referred to in an effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a change pattern command is received ) Are separately provided.

  In S1515, the reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection process is referred to. The reel scenario table includes a position (exposed position) where the player can visually recognize the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a position (storage position) where the player cannot visually recognize the reel member. A plurality of scenarios in which the reel position to determine the position to be positioned and the rotation speed of the reel member as the rotation speed are determined in advance are prepared. Based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount Are appropriately selected and set (see FIG. 134 (a)).

  In the processing of S1512, when the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), a variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C (S1516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the variable display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1340). Of the variable display setting process 2, the same processes as S1701 to S1709 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example are executed in the processes of S1711 to S1719. Detailed description is omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and will be described below.

  In the process of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is a reel mode entry pattern (S1720). When it is a reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this process is terminated. Note that the reel mode entry pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command when the determination result of special symbol is a big hit includes more stop type selection commands than the stop type selection command when the determination result of special symbol is not a big hit. ing.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a reel mode end pattern (S1722). If it is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to OFF (S1723), and this process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 133. In the third control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the second control example. Specifically, a point where a prize change process is added to the above-described command determination process, a point where a volume setting process 2 is added, a point where a special effect process is added, and a point where a shake control process 2 is added This is different in that other processing is added. Since the other configuration is the same, the description of the other configuration is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 118, the display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described. Here, the special volume setting effect will be described. The special volume setting effect is an effect that occurs based on the ball being entered, and during the period in which the effect is occurring, the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) (see FIG. 130). When the sound volume is set by this special sound volume setting, the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the special jackpot expectation degree of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the holding symbol are special voice, sound volume or display mode. It is comprised so that it may alert | report using.

  According to the special sound volume setting effect configured as described above, notification that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot is also executed by the operation of setting the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, two types of settings, volume setting and expectation suggestion notification (production setting), are enabled based on one operation performed by the player, and the frame button 22 (operation means) performed for the player to enjoy the game can be set. There is an effect that the number of operations can be reduced.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special sound volume setting effect. As shown in the figure, when the special sound volume setting effect is executed, a part of the sub-symbol (blank symbol) is changed to a volume symbol indicating the sound volume setting and displayed. During this special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area in which the volume symbol is displayed, and the player is placed on the glass plate 16a corresponding to the volume symbol. A special volume can be set by touching.

  When the special volume setting is enabled, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided in the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol displayed on the display screen is changed to a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the volume level and displayed.

  Further, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol is changed to a display mode according to the jackpot expectation level of the special symbol whose display mode is fluctuating or the jackpot expectation level in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the volume design color is changed from white to blue to yellow to red to rainbow. In addition to changing the color as a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation, for example, changing the type of the pattern displayed on the volume symbol, or changing the form of the symbol mark displayed on the volume symbol It is possible to change the number or increase the number.

  Furthermore, as a notification effect based on the degree of expectation of jackpot, not only the display mode of the volume symbol may be changed, but notification using voice (volume) may be performed, for example, an operation for raising the volume level is performed. Regardless, a contradiction effect that the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, or a notification sound effect that notifies that the hit determination result has a jackpot may be performed. Thus, when the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation degree is performed using sound, so that different categories of the volume setting and the notification effect can be related. This makes it possible to make the player who has set the volume aware of the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation.

  In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is described as the special volume setting effect, but the same control may be used in addition to the volume setting. For example, you may use when setting the brightness | luminance and hue of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (liquid crystal display device). When adopting such a configuration, the sub-pattern (blank symbol) is changed to a light symbol indicating luminance or a color bar symbol indicating hue, and the above-described symbol display mode is used as a notification effect based on the degree of expectation of jackpot. In addition to the effect to be changed, notification may be made using a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided in the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation is executed with visual notification effects (lamp brightness and hue) based on an operation performed by the player to change the visual settings (brightness and hue). It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the notification effect.

  In addition, a plurality of sub symbols (blank symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed to volume symbols, light symbols, and color bar symbols, respectively, so that settings corresponding to the symbols selected by the player are performed. May be.

  In this control example, it is configured to change the sub symbol that is displayed in a stopped state and a part of the sub symbol that is displayed in a variable manner to a volume symbol, but only the sub symbol that is displayed in a stopped state can be changed to a volume symbol. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the sub-symbol during the variable display can be changed to the volume symbol. Moreover, you may make it alert | report a jackpot expectation degree based on the volume setting operation in normal time.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which whether or not the player has touched the volume symbol is determined based on the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600, but the volume symbol is obtained by an operation using an operating means other than the left and right sensor device 600. You may make it the structure which discriminate | determines that it selected.

  As described above, in the special volume setting effect in this control example, the player performs only the operation of setting the volume, and the state suggestion notification effect that suggests the jackpot expectation level is also performed. It is possible to suppress the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291) from being complicated.

  Moreover, since the aspect using the sound is used as the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, the player can easily notice the state suggestion notification effect.

  Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing for executing the time effect period. First, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the current time information is the time measuring means by the time setting process (see FIG. 86) in the start-up process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC 292. Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period (effect mode B) is set after 54 minutes have elapsed. Note that the normal game period (effect mode A) is set for the period until the preparation period is set. Then, when one minute has elapsed since the preparation period (effect mode B) is set, the time effect period (effect mode C) is set. Thereafter, the normal game period is set again after 5 minutes have elapsed since the time effect period (effect mode C) was set.

  In this control example, the player acquires points during the normal game period (production mode A1), displays the results of the points acquired during the preparation period (production mode B), and performs time production according to the acquired points. The content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) is changed, and the effect of changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) is performed based on the result of the time effect.

  Next, the detailed contents of effects in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. Note that description of the same effects as those described in the first control example is omitted.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, in order for the player to earn points. It is a figure which shows the mini game performed. Three treasure chests are arranged in the center of the display screen, and above that, a comment for prompting the player to select an arbitrary treasure chest is displayed. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure chest, a display mode showing points appears from the selected treasure chest and is added to the player's earned points.

  Further, on this display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum acquirable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as “10/100” in the lower left of the screen. The contents of the time effect executed during the subsequent time effect period are determined in accordance with the points acquired during the normal game period.

  Furthermore, an acquisition point indicator with a maximum value set to 100 points is displayed in the vicinity of the area where the acquisition points are displayed, and it is visually shown how much the current acquisition points are relative to the maximum value. It is possible to grasp. Further, this indicator is provided with boundary lines at the points indicating the number of acquired points 40, 70, 90, and the characters “GET” are displayed for the respective boundary lines. In the figure, a display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

  This boundary line indicates a value at which a table (see FIG. 125 (a)) used when determining the content of a time effect (effect performed in effect mode C) to be performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in a manner that is visible to the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required until there is a possibility of changing the time performance while using the boundary line as the target value. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the mini game can be increased.

  Further, the display of the number of acquired points on the indicator is configured so that the color changes when the boundary line is exceeded. In the present control example, the above-described two displays for the earned points are performed, but only one of them may be displayed.

  In addition to the mini game shown in FIG. 120 (a), this control example is configured so that points can be obtained even in a normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b). Therefore, FIG. 120B will be described.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect “Fish Reach”. FIG. When “fish school reach” is executed, “fish school GET + 20 points” is displayed on the display screen, and 20 acquired points are added. In this way, even if it is a normal game effect, it is possible to earn points when a specific effect is executed, so it is possible to accumulate points even if the mini game cannot be operated well. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effects that occur during the normal game period.

  In addition, about the point which can be acquired by normal game production, it is good to comprise so that the specific production to which the number of points and a point are given can be set up at random. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to display on the display screen the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the current normal game period. In addition, when all the effects set as the specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege that sets the acquired points to MAX may be provided.

  Also, it may be configured not to add a part of the points on the display without displaying all the points obtained by executing the mini game or the specific effects during the normal game period, for example, , It is good to acquire and display fewer points than the points actually earned in the mini game, or to display a part of the effect set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display . With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the specific number of points earned, and the production can be enjoyed until the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)).

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and is the points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which announces the result of a number. In the upper area of the display screen, a comment for notifying that “contact time”, which is a time effect, will start soon is displayed, and in the right area of the display screen, the remaining time until the time effect is started (35 A countdown display unit that counts down seconds) is provided. When the numerical value (seconds) displayed on the countdown display unit becomes 0, the time effect period (effect mode C) is entered and the time effect is started.

  Furthermore, the left area of this display screen is provided with an acquisition point result display section for displaying the result of the number of points acquired during the normal game period (effect mode A1), and the points acquired during the normal game period are displayed. Is done. In addition, when it is configured not to display all the points acquired during the normal game period on the display screen, it is only during the normal game period that the result of the number of points displayed in the result display part of this figure is seen. The number of points earned can be grasped.

  FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and is the points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen on which the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (refer FIG. 125 (a)) using a number is displayed. In the upper area of the display screen, a comment indicating that the dog type used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) has been determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog type display unit for displaying the currently determined dog type is provided, and a dog type C is displayed as a dog type used during the next time production period. In addition, the countdown display section displays the remaining 9 seconds.

  Here, the dog breed used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breed A to dog breed D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time production period, and are selected and determined by a dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) described later. Each dog breed has individuality, and the degree of increase in reliability in the production during the contact time (during time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, for the breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set to “normal”, and the effect that allows custom setting of the reliability is set as “fish reach”.

  In this control example, the kind of production that can set the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability can be customized for each dog type. However, the player can set the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability as a custom setting. You may enable it to select the kind of production which can be performed. In such a case, for example, when dog breed D is selected, the range that can be selected decreases, and when dog breed A is selected, the range that can be selected increases. With this configuration, the player plays a game such that the dog breed A is set to perform various custom settings.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that game aspects other than the game aspect (type of reach, reliability) described in this control example can be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of a premier effect in a variable display in which the determination result is a big hit, the appearance rate of an effect capable of giving a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and the like can be considered.

  In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period in which points are acquired (effect mode A1) and a period in which an effect based on the contents set in the time effect is executed (effect mode A2). However, for example, the player may be able to select which period to execute during the normal game period at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time effect period). With this configuration, if a desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it becomes possible to select a period for acquiring points again, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

  Also, the normal game period may be divided into a first half part and a second half part, the first half part may be a period for performing the production based on the contents set during the time production period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points. Both the period to acquire and the period to perform the production based on the content set in the time production may be overlapped, and both may be performed simultaneously.

  Furthermore, the points acquired during the normal game period may be accumulated all day, and the contents of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play a long game. In addition, information (for example, a password) created based on information read by the external device by converting the acquired points into information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can be read by an external terminal (portable device) May be input to the pachinko machine 10 so that a game in which the previous acquired points are taken over can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who has no time to play a long game across the day.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the detailed contents of the effect in the shaking effect 2 will be described. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, and the player uses an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40), which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges | operates to operate the frame button 22 with sufficient timing to shake.

  Here, the shaking effect 2 will be described. The shaking effect 2 is an effect of moving the arm member 444 slightly shaking based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. More specifically, the timing at which the movable state (swing state) data of the arm member 444 is calculated from information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444, and the operation timing is notified on the display screen based on the calculated data. Display notifications. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swing state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444. It is.

  In the shaking effect 2 described above, when the player operates the frame button 22 in a timely manner, the arm member 444 is controlled to swing greatly, and when the player operates the frame button 22 in a bad timing, the arm member 444 is controlled. It is controlled so that the shaking is reduced. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the player's operation, the player feels that he / she is participating in the performance of the pachinko machine 10, so that the player is prevented from getting bored early. be able to.

  Further, in the shaking effect 2 in the present control example, the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual shaking state of the variable member, and thus is displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual swinging state of the variable member are synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated in a timely manner in accordance with the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to be greatly shaken, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. In the center area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), a comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a figure simulating the frame button 22 are displayed. In the lower right area of the display screen, Is provided with a timing display portion on which an indicator is displayed to increase or decrease in the left-right direction within the predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display unit is displayed to increase or decrease in the horizontal direction based on information obtained by converting the actual swinging state of the arm member 444 into data using an acceleration sensor. Note that the speed of increasing / decreasing movement in the left / right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swinging width of the arm member 444 increases, or the information obtained from the acceleration sensor is corrected and controlled so as to always have a constant speed. Also good.

  The timing at which the indicator is positioned at the center position S (range a) in the predetermined area M is the timing at which the arm member 444 is most efficiently shaken by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. Control is performed so that the arm member 444 does not largely shake as the timing is further away from the center position S (b range → c range). It should be noted that the timing display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during one shaking effect 2.

  In this control example, an effect that the player operates the frame button 22 in a timely manner is used as the swing member effect 2, but an effect shown in FIG. 122 (b) may be used as other effects. 122 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, and the arm member 444 in which the player is a variable member (see FIG. 40). It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges | hangs the frame button 22 in order to shake a frame.

  In this other example, a comment urging the player to perform the continuous hitting operation of the frame button 22 and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the central area of the display screen, and the continuous hitting is performed in the right area of the display screen. There is provided a repeated hit number display section for displaying an indicator that moves upward (increases) in accordance with the number of times. In another example shown in the figure, the indicator of the repeated hitting number display portion rises according to the number of hits of the frame button 22 repeatedly. The arm member 444 may be configured to be driven at a timing at which the arm member 444 is greatly shaken as the indicator level of the continuous hitting number display portion is higher (as it is increased).

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example, a rotating body operation table 222f and a dog breed selection table 222g are added to the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 123B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example is added with a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β with respect to the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, in the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the fluctuation start flag 223d are not described, but these are stored in the other memory area 223z. It is assumed that it is included, only the description thereof is omitted, and the same processing as in the second control example is performed.

  Next, a combination of figures displayed on the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body operation table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and an error range used when setting the combination of the figures in this control example. Here, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate, the rotation is always transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b by the transmission mechanism (the detailed description is the same as in the first embodiment and is omitted). To do). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355 that is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b is set to 20.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate and the first gear 353 rotates by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a rotates about 25 degrees. The second gear 355 is also rotated by one tooth in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate at different angles based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. In the rotating body operation table shown in the figure, No. Are provided from “1” to “141”. No. shown on the vertical axis. Is attached corresponding to the unit in which the drive motor control means controls, that is, for each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. For example, no. No. 1 shows a state in which the first rotating body 340a rotates 25 degrees and the second rotating body 340b rotates 18 degrees. It is shown as 2. Hereinafter, numbers are assigned in order based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. No. is “141”. It returns to the same state as “1”. That is, when the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are 140 teeth, that is, the first rotating body 340a is 3600 degrees (10 rotations) and the second rotating body 340b is 2520 degrees (7 rotations), It is configured to return to the state.

  Further, the rotating body operation table is provided with a first error range and a second error range. It is shown whether the display mode of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b corresponding to is acceptable as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. In addition, about the mechanism in which an error generate | occur | produces in the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b, and the structure which prevents that an unnatural feeling generate | occur | produces in a display mode by the error is the structure demonstrated in 1st Embodiment mentioned above. Since it is the same as that, its description is omitted.

  The first error range shown in the rotating body operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and the second error range is The error range is wider than the first error range, and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to the player.

  For example, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the state of “48” is “B, B ′”, and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the state “89” is also “B, B ′”, and this display mode is set as the second error range.

  This is No. 1 which is the first error range from the display mode (display information) of the current rotating body acquired in the pre-reading reel display effect process (see FIG. 129) described later. When the rotation amount until moving to “48” is a predetermined amount or more, No. 2 which is the second error range. This is because correction can be performed so as to move to “89”.

  By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time until each rotating body is stopped (the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol) is short, for example, a winning command generated during the fluctuation display of the third symbol is used. Even if it is a fluctuating effect using a rotating body based on a rotating effect based on operating a frame button 22 generated while the 3rd symbol is fluctuating, a predetermined stop display mode is displayed. It becomes possible to make it.

  In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the first embodiment is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are moved in the normal rotation direction (No. ascending order) or the reverse rotation direction ( No. in descending order) and is controlled by drive motor control means provided in the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, each table used in the special effect process and the shaking effect process 2 added in this control example will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog breed selection table used in a special effect process (see FIG. 132) described later.

  This dog breed selection table is based on the points (mission achievement result) acquired while the production mode is set to mode A, and the special production (contact time) executed while the production mode is set to mode C. Is a table for selecting the dog type used in step (1), and is configured to select any of the dog type A to dog type D according to the mission achievement result.

  Dog breed A to dog breed D are set so that the degree of increase in reliability in the production during the contact time (during time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in the reliability is set to “normal”, and the performance for which the reliability can be custom-set is set as “fish reach”. Note that the more the points of the mission achievement result, the higher the production effect is set for the player, and the dog type A is set to be the dog type with the highest production effect.

  Here, the high production effect means that, for example, by increasing the appearance frequency of productions that rarely appear in normal (premier production) or by expanding the range of custom settings for reliability, This means that a production that cannot be experienced in a state can be experienced.

  Next, FIG. 125B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a shaking operation table 2 used in a shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. This shaking motion table 2 acquires the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable status of the variable member (arm member 444) in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when the shaking effect is performed. It is a table which sets the direction which rotates a variable member (arm member 444) based on acceleration sensor information for doing.

  In the shaking motion table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timings are divided into three, “81 to 100”, “51 to 80”, and “0 to 50”. This section corresponds to each of the indicators “a”, “b”, and “c” displayed in FIG. 122A. For example, the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is in a circle (center position S). In the case of (b), the direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated is set with reference to the table of “81 to 100” corresponding to the button operation timing “a”.

  Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the swing motion table 2 in FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the variable member. For example, the acceleration sensor When the information acquired from (2) indicates a situation where the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

  Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set with reference to the table corresponding to the button operation timing and acceleration sensor information described above. In this control example, when the button operation timing is “81 to 100”, data for driving the drive motor is set in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member is increased, and when the button operation timing is “51 to 80”. The data for driving the drive motor is not set to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. Furthermore, when the button operation timing is “0 to 50”, data for driving the drive motor in a direction in which the rotation width of the variable member is reduced is set.

  In this control example, data for driving the drive motor is not set in order to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. However, data for driving the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is not set. It may be set.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 133, the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example is different from each control example described above in that a part of the command determination process, the volume setting process, and the shake control process is changed, and a special effect process is newly added. The parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the details of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main process. In the main process, first, the processes from S1301 to S1310 are executed as in the second control example. Next, a command determination process 2 for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1351). Details of the command determination process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed similarly to the above-described second control example, and then the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Next, the shake control process 2 (S1354) executed during the shake effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is executed. Details of the shaking control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  And the other process (S1355) described in the 1st control example or the 2nd control example mentioned above is performed, and the process from S1317 to S1321 is performed similarly to the 2nd control example mentioned above. In S1355, a synchronous effect management process (S1313), a left / right selection process (S1315), and a reel control process (S1330) are executed.

  Next, the details of the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1351). In this command determination process 2 (S1351), a winning effect changing process (S1451) that is performed when a special symbol winning command is received is added to the command determination process (S1311) in the second control example described above. The other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process 2, first, the processes from S1401 to S1410 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 88) described above. Next, when it is determined in S1410 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), processing corresponding to other commands (S1412) is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the special symbol winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area (S1411), and the effect changing process at winning is performed. (S1451) is executed. This winning effect changing process (S1451) is a process of changing the effect based on the winning command when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110. FIG. Will be described later. Then, after performing the winning effect changing process (S1451), the process proceeds to S1412.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main controller 110, an effect based on information included in the winning command (so-called pre-reading effect) can be realized. It is described as follows. As a result, by changing the presentation at a timing other than the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, it becomes possible to execute various presentations, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to get bored by the player There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the winning effect changing process (S1451) performed in the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the winning effect changing process (S1451). In the winning effect changing process (S1451), processing related to the effect (so-called pre-reading effect) executed based on the information included in the received winning command is executed.

  In the winning effect changing process, firstly, winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the prefetch effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetch effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403).

  The chance eye display effect is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the winning command received this time, and the third symbol that is executed until the third symbol variation based on the winning command received this time is started. In the variation, the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed is a specific combination determined in advance other than the combination that is a jackpot, which is an effect that suggests the possibility that a jackpot exists in the determination result of the reserved symbols.

  If it is determined in S4403 that the pre-reading effect is not a chance eye display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403: Yes), it is then determined whether the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404).

  If it is determined that the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404: Yes), a stop type command for display in which the stop symbol is a chance is set (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4408.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the third symbol is not changing at high speed (S4404: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405). When the remaining change time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the third symbol is more than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), a reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining variation time (S4406), and a setting start flag is set. Set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S4408.

  As described above, in the chance eye display effect in the present control example, the mode of displaying the chance eye can be varied according to the timing at which the winning command including the information for executing the chance target effect is received. That is, if the timing at which the winning command is received is variably displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 3rd symbol is changing at high speed, a process of changing the change stop symbol to the chance is executed. However, since there is no sense of incongruity to the player, a display stop type command is set in which the stop symbol of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes a chance. On the other hand, when the timing of receiving the winning command is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the third symbol is not changing at high speed (for example, at least one of a plurality of symbol strings is stopped and displayed. The reel member (the first rotating body 340a of the first rotating body 340a) provided in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 at a low timing or at least one of a plurality of symbol rows. The third symbol display device 81 displays a composite of the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and displays a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body. Control is performed to display the chance eye by raising the position (exposure position) covering the third symbol displayed on the screen.

  With this configuration, even if a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received at the timing when the third symbol is stopped or displayed at a low speed on the display screen, the player feels uncomfortable. The chance eyes can be displayed without. Therefore, when a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received, the stop display of the changing 3rd symbol can be changed to the chance, and the 3rd symbol changing without giving the player a sense of incongruity. There is an effect that the period during which the stop display can be changed to the chance display can be extended.

  In this control example, the remaining variation time of the third symbol is determined in S4405. This is because, in the normal gaming state, the reel member housed in the housing position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is driven to the exposed position that covers the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 by driving the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300. If the time required to raise the reel member to the exposed position is shortened, the remaining fluctuation time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

  Further, in this control example, the reel members stored in the storage position are reel-controlled so that the display mode combined and displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof is the display mode corresponding to the chance pattern of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member is finished and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the reel control described above is executed. It should be noted that when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are positioned at the origin position (initial position), the display mode displayed on the display surface may be configured to be a display mode corresponding to the chance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide reel control that makes the display mode of the reel member a chance, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. Next, a pre-read reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the pre-reading reel display effect is a pre-reading reel in order to reliably display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the pre-reading reel display effect within the variation time. This is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member until the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the display effect information is started. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the pre-read reel display effect process (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-read effect is a special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period during which a special volume setting different from the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) is possible, and when the volume is set by the special volume setting. This is an effect in which the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the expected value of the jackpot of the special symbol being changed or the expected value of the jackpot in the reserved symbol is notified using a special voice, volume or display mode.

  If it is not determined in S4409 that the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting (S4409: Yes), a display stop type command is set in which the blank symbol (sub-symbol) is changed to the volume symbol (S4410). Then, the sound volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

  Next, other processing relating to the prefetch effect is executed (S4412). Here, as other processing, for example, there is processing for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on information included in the winning command. After executing the other prefetch processing of S4412, this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device, a pre-reading effect is executed based on information included in the winning command. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that suggests the result of the determination based on the prize between the time the ball is won at the prize opening and the special symbol corresponding to the prize starts to change. Thus, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the pre-read reel display effect process (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing pre-read reel display effect processing (S4408). This pre-read reel display effect process (S4408) is a process related to the pre-read effect performed during the above-described winning effect changing process (S1451).

  When the pre-read reel display effect process is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (sub-third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and pre-read stop display information (sub-third symbol based on the winning command) are displayed. Stop display information) is acquired (S4501). The sub third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by combining and displaying symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Further, the rotation of the first rotator 340 a and the second rotator 340 b is controlled by the drive of the drive motor 350.

  Therefore, the present display information can be acquired by detecting the rotational drive status of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (number of pulses) for rotationally driving the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, is detected, and a location corresponding to the current number of steps is acquired as current display information from the rotating body operation table.

  The acquisition of the pre-reading stop display information is to determine the stop display symbol of the sub third symbol based on the winning command from the information included in the winning command, and the stop display symbol is first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range. Information is acquired.

  Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the prefetch stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. corresponding to the current display information. And No. corresponding to the pre-read stop display information. And the difference is calculated. In this control example, since the drive motor 350 is configured to be capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the difference to be calculated is that when the drive motor 350 is rotated forward (the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. increases). ) And when the drive motor 350 is reversed (when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases), the rotation amount with the smaller difference is calculated.

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the rotation amount calculated by S4502 is a rotation amount which rotates a 1st rotary body more than 1080 degree | times (S4503). Here, the rotation amount of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it takes about 1 second for the first rotating body to make one round. That is, in S4503, the current display information corresponds to No. No. corresponding to the pre-read stop display information. It is determined whether the number of seconds required to move (rotate) to 3 is 3 seconds or more.

  When it is determined in the process of S4503 that the rotation amount is a rotation amount that is rotated more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), No. corresponding to the stop display information. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. However, No. corresponding to the stop display information in the first error range. No. which needs to be rotated more than 1080 degrees in order to rotate up to In this case, the stop display information corresponding to the stop display information within the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less No. corresponding to the stop display information in the process of S4506. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range, the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4503 that the rotation amount is 1080 degrees or less, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, this process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. In the reel scenario table, a table that is referred to in an effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a change pattern command is received ) Are separately provided.

  In S4504, the reel scenario table corresponding to the prefetch control process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, either the position (exposed position) where the player can visually recognize the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b or the position (storage position) where the player cannot visually recognize the reel member. The reel position at which it is determined to be positioned, the rotation speed of the reel member, the presence / absence of pre-rotation, and the presence / absence of a notification effect that informs the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared, and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on the information included in the winning command, the rotational operation amount, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Note that the pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table is a No. corresponding to the current display information. No. corresponding to the stop display information. The winning command includes pre-reading information (pre-reading reel display effect information) as well as the special symbol variation display corresponding to the winning command including pre-reading information (pre-reading reel display effect information). No. corresponding to the current display information is also displayed while other variation display (preliminary variation display) executed until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to is started. No. corresponding to the stop display information. This is a control to turn the reel symbol in advance toward.

  This pre-rotation control is based on a pattern in which the amount of rotation operation is rotated by making the amount of rotation operation uniform for each variable display based on the number of pre-variable displays (or the number of reserved symbols), and the amount of rotation operation. There is a pattern of rotating at once up to the pre-rotation operation amount set based on this, and these are set based on the value acquired from the effect counter and the variation time of each variation display.

  By using such a configuration, even if the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the pre-read information (information on the pre-read reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the variable display ( The number of rotations) can be reduced in advance, and a pre-read reel display effect can be provided to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  When performing the above-mentioned pre-rotation, the pre-rotation is performed with the effect that the reel is raised to the exposure position and pre-rotation, and the reel is lowered again to the storage position, and the reel is positioned at the storage position. It is advisable to provide both production patterns for performing

  By configuring in this way, in the former production pattern, by performing preliminary rotation at the exposure position, the player is informed that the pre-read reel display production is being performed, while expecting the player In the latter production pattern, which allows games to be performed, it is possible to execute the contents of the pre-rotation without notice to the player by performing the pre-rotation at the storage position. (Stop display at No. corresponding to the stop display information) can be quickly displayed.

  In addition, the notification effect for notifying the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed is an effect of swinging and driving the container 300 as a reel member at the storage position, and a plurality of values are obtained based on values acquired from the effect counter. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

  Note that a gaming state and a gaming result may be added as a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to complicate the effect pattern, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as one round of about 1 second, in practice, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low-speed rotation, medium-speed rotation, High speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the processing of S4503, the stop display information corresponding to the stop display information based on the rotation speed when the low-speed rotation is performed. Is provided with a correction boundary value (1080 degrees) for correcting from the first error range to the second error range.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to stop display the stop display information to the player no matter what rotation speed is set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the prefetch stop display information is larger than a predetermined amount. The stop display symbol is displayed No. However, the stop display symbol may be set from the first error range or the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the pre-reading reel display effect as the pre-reading effect is started, or until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. Based on the time, whether to obtain the stop display symbol from the first error range or from the second error range may be set. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to display stop display information to the player more reliably.

  In this control example, this process is configured as an effect process based on the receipt of a winning command (so-called prefetch effect process). For example, an effect process based on the reception of a variation pattern command This processing may be used as By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine which error range the stop display symbol is set based on the variation time of the variation, and there is a problem that the stop display is not in time within the variation time. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Moreover, you may use for the production | presentation performed based on the player operating the frame button 22 besides that. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs a variable display of the 3rd symbol, and the player operates the frame button 22. An effect is possible in which the variation display of the third symbol is changed to a mode using a reel member.

  Even when such an effect is executed, the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is changed to that of the third symbol using the reel member during the variation display of the special symbol. When the effect of switching to the variable display is used, as shown in this control example, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member can be set from the first error range and the second error range. If there is a margin in the symbol remaining time, it can be set from within the first error range, and if there is no margin in the variation time, it can be set from the second error range. It is possible to suppress such problems as not being present, and by providing the second error range, the display mode of the third symbol can be changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member even when the remaining time of variation of the special symbol is reduced. For To change to the display was able to allow.

  In this control example, the symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol (rotary symbol) synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are respectively displayed. Although it is used as 3 symbols, for example, only a liquid crystal design may be a 3rd design with a rotating design as an effect design for production (designs that do not directly correspond to the variation display of special symbols), or a liquid crystal design. May be used as the production symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. In addition, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotating symbol during one fluctuation display. By constituting in this way, it becomes possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

  Next, the details of the sound volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process 2 (S1352). This volume setting process 2 (S1352) is different from the above-described volume setting process (S1314) in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be on is added, and the other parts are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the volume setting period flag 223α is ON (S4601). When it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not on (S4601: No), the above-described volume setting process (S1314) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), it is then determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set to on (S4602). If the special volume setting flag 223β is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether or not the volume symbol has been selected by the player (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that no volume symbol has been selected (S4603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume symbol is selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). . Next, special volume setting period management processing (S4606) is executed.

  When the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the volume level controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 is switched from the volume level in the normal game to the special volume level during the special volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect is finished and the normal game is returned, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, the troublesome operation that the player again sets the volume of the pachinko machine 10 to the volume level suitable for the normal game can be eliminated.

  Returning to the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is on (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). If it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has been pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is raised and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and a display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has not been pressed (S4607: No), it is then determined whether the lower selection switch 291b has been pressed (S4610).

  If it is determined in step S4610 that the lower selection switch 291b has not been pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to a special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and the special volume level is displayed. Command is set (S4612). Next, special volume setting period management processing (S4606) is executed.

  The special volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process for managing a period during which the special volume is set, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S4606 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, details of the special sound volume setting period management process (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management process (S4606).

  In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether or not the volume setting period flag 223α is OFF (S4701). If it is determined that the sound volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4701: No), it is then determined whether a stop command corresponding to the winning information in which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is made by receiving a stop command set in S300 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed by main controller 110.

  In this control example, identification information that can be associated is given to the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device, and the winning command is indicated by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 based on the identification information. The winning information and the stop command are configured to be associated with each other, but other configurations may be used. For example, an area storing prize information including information on special volume setting effects is stored in the prize information storage area, and the area storing prize information including information on special volume setting effects is shifted to the execution area. You may make it the structure which manages this.

  Returning to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set in the process of S4702 (not received yet) (S4702: No), this process ends because it is still the volume setting period. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a stop command corresponding to the winning information set with the special volume setting effect (received), the special volume level is cleared (S4703), and the display command for deleting the display of the special volume setting screen is displayed. Is set (S4704). Next, the sound volume setting period flag 223α is set to OFF (S4705), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level as the special volume level. Has been. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect is ended and the normal game is returned, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect is started (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area). It becomes possible to return to preparation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the details of the special effect process (S1353) that is performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect process (S1353).

  In the special effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). If it is determined that the current effect mode is not mode A (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is mode A (S4801: Yes), it is then determined whether a mini game is being played (S4802). Here, the mini game refers to the game effect shown in FIG. 120A in which the player acquires points by operating the operation means (the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, and the selection switch 291).

  If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the mini game is not being played (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the mini game (S4802: Yes), points according to the result of the mini game are added to the earned point storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the earned points is set (S4804). ). Then, the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, it is determined whether the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect in which points can be obtained by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). In the process of S4805, when it is determined that it is not a specific effect (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a specific effect (S4805: Yes), points according to the specific effect are added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

  As described above, the special effect process when the effect mode is mode A is a process of adding points acquired by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect. Note that another method may be used as a method by which the player can acquire points during the production mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured such that a predetermined password can be input, and points may be added when the player inputs the predetermined password, or the game result (the number of jackpots or the number of winnings) You may comprise so that a point may be added based on a ball.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing in the case where the effect mode is mode A (S4802 to S4807) is executed, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is mode B (S4808). If it is determined that the effect mode is not mode B (S4808: No), the process proceeds to S4811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the production mode is mode B (S4808: Yes), the dog type is then selected from the dog type selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating the breed is set (S4810), and the process proceeds to S4811.

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is mode B, a process of selecting a dog type used in mode C to be described later is performed based on the points acquired during mode A. In this control example, by selecting a specific dog type from a plurality of types of dog types, the contents of the settings performed during mode C (the production reliability and the production type for setting the reliability) are changed. Although it is configured as described above, it may be configured so that the player can select the type of setting and the degree of increase in reliability performed during mode C based on the points acquired during mode A during mode B. Good. When configured in this way, it is preferable to increase the range that can be selected by the player as the number of points acquired during mode A increases. By doing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to positively acquire points, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the process (S4809 to S4810) when the effect mode is mode B is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not mode C (S4811: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is C (S4811: Yes), an effect corresponding to the dog type set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-described special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, with respect to the second control example described above, an effect (special effect) in which the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is mode C can be changed (custom setting). About, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the type of production subject to custom setting and the degree of increase in reliability of the production based on the points acquired when the production mode is mode A. Even when the player is staying in the effect mode, the player can always participate in the game effect, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the details of the shake control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the shake control process 2 (S1354).

  In the shake control process 2, it is first determined whether or not the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). If it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operating flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), it is then determined whether the variation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902).

  If it is determined in step S4902 that the variation pattern is not a shaking effect (S4902: No), other shaking control processing (S4911) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Note that the other shake control process executed in S4911 is the shake control process (S1316) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S49028 that the variation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902: Yes), initial operation data for driving the arm member 444 (movable accessory) in a predetermined manner is set ( In step S4903, the operating flag is set to ON (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided in the movable accessory is read, and the swing information of the movable accessory is acquired (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator based on the information of the acceleration sensor is set (S4906). The indicator corresponding to the display command set here is an indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG.

  When the processing of S4906 is executed, it is next determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the swing motion data is obtained from the swing motion table (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor. Set. And it is discriminate | determined whether the shaking production was complete | finished (S4909).

  If it is determined that the shaking effect has not ended (S4909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the shaking effect has ended (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. After setting (S4910), this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the swing control process 2 in this control example, the operation state of the movable accessory is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable accessory) and is operated by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operation means) and the operation status of the movable accessory, the movable accessory is moved in a direction in which it is greatly shaken (movable direction), or the movable accessory is shaken in a small direction (movable) Since the swing motion (movable motion) table 2 is used to set whether the movable member is movable in the direction), the variable member is actually controlled to move based on the player's operation. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to actively operate the operation means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, in this control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for informing the timing at which the player operates the operation means based on the operation state of the movable accessory acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is configured to be able to display on the display screen, the player can cause the movable accessory to perform a desired movable operation by operating the operation means while viewing the operation timing notification display.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (the bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed, The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command and the game state command, the back image and the super reach reach can be changed according to the game state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning to be notified to the sound lamp controller 113 as the number of reserved balls. Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Information on various counters (first random number counter C1 and first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is an audio lamp. You may notify to the control apparatus 113. FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first winning port 64 on which a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters the game board 13 is provided, but this is not necessarily the case. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the pass through the through gate 66 or 67 are configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on winning in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of reserved balls or in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In addition, in this control example, it is possible to set a normal gaming state in which the special jackpot probability is low probability and a probability variation gaming state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is high as the gaming state, and the normal symbol is more likely to hit. Although the pachinko machine which can set the short time state which is a game state and the normal state where a normal symbol is hard to hit than the short state is used, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine having other game states. For example, when the special symbol jackpot probability is in the probability variation state, acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is advantageous to the player even if the result of determining whether the special symbol is wrong or not. You may enable it to set the 2nd probability change game state in which a state (what is called a small hit) is set with a probability higher than usual. Note that “small winning” is a state in which a ball can be won in the variable winning device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is not satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, the player who has entered the probability variation game state will be aiming for the second probability variation game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and will get bored early in the game. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the case where the second probability variation gaming state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of determinations of whether or not the special symbol is executed during the probability variation gaming state. May be configured to shift from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state. With this configuration, the probability variation gaming state will not continue until the next big hit if it becomes the probability variation gaming state as in the past, so even in the probability variation gaming state, it is concentrated on the player A game can be performed.

  As described above, when the second probability variation gaming state is set in the pachinko machine or the like in which the number of times of determination of success / failure is set for the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the player obtains more balls in the second probability variation gaming state. You will be aware of jackpots and jackpots. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a concentrated manner, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Furthermore, when using a gaming machine that can set the second probability variation gaming state, it is preferable to provide a plurality of third symbol display devices and switch the device that displays the variation of the third symbol according to the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to inform the surrounding players that the game is being played in the most advantageous game state for the player, such as the second probability variation game state, and to give the player a sense of satisfaction. Can be provided.

  Note that as the plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in this control example and the reel members (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body provided in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300). A member that synthesizes and displays the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface of 340b and rotates and displays each of the plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body may be used. With this configuration, the variation display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the difference in appearance can be clarified.

  In addition, the lifting / lowering control of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 moves the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 to an exposed position (a position covering at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) visible to the player, Since it can be moved to a storage position that is difficult to visually recognize (a position stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the variation display of the third symbol in the second probability variation gaming state is reeled. By being configured to be performed by a member, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 is playing the game in the second probability variation gaming state only by being positioned at the exposed position, and the player is satisfied A feeling can be provided.

  Furthermore, as the raising / lowering control of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 performs an operation of moving back and forth between the storage position and the exposure position, thereby providing an effect that suggests the current gaming state to the player. Since it can be performed, it is possible to provide an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the second probability variation gaming state, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays a variable display that suggests whether or not the special symbol success / failure determination result is a big hit, and the reel member has a special symbol success / failure determination result that is a small hit. It is also possible to execute a variable display that suggests whether or not. By configuring in this way, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member on which a variable display indicating whether or not a small hit is made in the first half period of the second probability variation gaming state, and the second half of the second probability variation gaming state. When the period comes, attention is paid to the third symbol display device 81 on which a variable display suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

  Using a different display device, a variable display that indicates whether or not the special symbol's success / failure determination result is a big hit and a special symbol that shows whether or not the special symbol's success / failure determination result is a small hit When displaying simultaneously, either one should be displayed as a 3rd design and the other should be displayed as a decoration design. In addition, an effect that suggests the result of the success / failure determination may be performed by a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, instead of a symbol display, or an effect using only sound and lamps. Furthermore, the display device that is variably displayed based on the determination result of the special symbol may be switched.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of Invention Taking Left / Right Sensor Device 600 as an Example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate arranged on the front side of the game board with a space through which game media can pass, and a displacement on the back side of the game board A displacement member that can be arranged and made visible to the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. In the gaming machine, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable up to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device.

  Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light toward the front of a game board (a plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from an object is provided, and the optical sensor allows the player to A device that detects the presence or movement of a finger is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). In this case, the path of the light (irradiation light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap the movement region of the displacement member formed so as to be displaceable (for example, paragraph 0045 of JP 2010-094348 A). And FIG. 5). Therefore, there is a problem that the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and the displacement member cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable up to a position that overlaps at least a part of the detection region of the sensor device, so that the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection region of the sensor device. Can do. In other words, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

  The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, for example, an optical sensor device (an irradiation unit that emits light composed of visible light or invisible light, and an object (object) irradiated from the irradiation unit. And a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light beam and evaluating the received light). As a method for evaluating the received light, a triangulation method that converts the imaging position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence / absence (distance) of an object, or the time required to receive light after irradiation A time-of-flight method for converting the value into the presence / absence (distance) of an object is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined interval from each other, and the displacement member includes a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A gaming machine A2 that can be displaced to a position that divides the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. These two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation for causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

  On the other hand, by evacuating the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, it is possible to release the division of the two detection areas by the displacement member. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is displaceable in an area overlapping at least one of the detection area of the first sensor or the detection area of the second sensor, and the first sensor is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection areas of the second sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor or the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of the detection area of at least one of the detection area of the first sensor or the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his / her hand or finger, the player can search for the detection area.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can serve as both the means for detecting the object on the front surface side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and there is no need to separately provide a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. . Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, it is possible to reduce the component cost.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4 includes a light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light, and the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided, it is possible to produce an effect by light emission of the light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to suppress erroneous detection of the sensor device. In addition, since the member for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device can also be used as the displacement member, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielding position, and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member receives light emitted from the light emitting means according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means that emits light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means, Can be suppressed from being received. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light incident on the sensor device from light emission of any of the light emitting means is provided, a large space is required for the arrangement of such members. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A5 or A6 includes a second displacing member disposed on the back side of the gaming board so as to be displaceable, visible through an opening of the gaming board, and disposed with the light emitting means. According to a displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can shield light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is disposed on the second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, it is possible to produce an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at different positions in accordance with the displacement of the second displacement member. . In this case, according to the displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. Can be suppressed from being received. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is provided for the arrangement of the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor. A gaming machine A8, wherein the other one of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light reflected by dirt on the transparent plate.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes the first sensor and the second sensor that are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the first sensor or the second sensor Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor or the second sensor can receive light, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. On the other hand, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, oil on the player's hand).

  For example, in the configuration in which one sensor device is disposed at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated obliquely to the transparent plate, the sensor device in front view Can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and an object (for example, a player's hand or finger) existing on the front side of the transparent plate can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening, with the opening of the gaming board interposed therebetween, for example. It can be difficult for the player to see. In this case, when the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor is reflected by dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor, and the transparent plate is stained. When there is no light, the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor. Thereby, the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate can be detected.

  In addition, it is preferable to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate by the first sensor and the second sensor in the process when the gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, there is no need to distinguish between an object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and dirt on the transparent plate because the player has not entered the store. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is characterized in that an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light is disposed on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Therefore, it can be avoided that the light reflected by the displacement member is received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the emitted light at a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the light emitted from the portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. The light reflected by the displacement member can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

  Further, since the portion of the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to an object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Thereby, a displacement member can be displaced, ensuring the detection area | region of a sensor apparatus.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is formed with a reflective surface that reflects the emitted light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is a reflection that reflects the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, it can be avoided that the light reflected by the displacement member is received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the central floating unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable; a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable with the displacement member; and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member. A gaming machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members displaceable independently of each other, and the first member being connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Here, a displaceable displacement member is provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. In addition, there is a type in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member, and the first member is rotated to enhance the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above, there is a problem that the first member rotates while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the change in the movement of the first member is poor.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member includes a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Moreover, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be capable of relative displacement, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member, and both are displaced by independent displacement, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. And as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  In addition, as a form of displacement of the arm member, for example, a form in which the other end is rotated, a form in which the other end is slid, a combination of these (one of the arm members is rotated, and the other is slid , Forms to be employed respectively).

  Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, the shaft disposed on one of the arm member or the first member is pivoted on the shaft hole disposed on the other. A configuration in which the supported shaft is rotatable relative to the shaft hole so as to be relatively displaceable, and a pin disposed on one of the arm member or the first member slides along a sliding groove disposed on the other A configuration in which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member, and the elastic member is elastically deformed so that the relative displacement can be performed, arranged on one of the arm member and the first member. The spherical member arranged on the other side is rotated in an arbitrary direction with respect to the stud that is in spherical contact with the ball, and the arm member and the first member have one or a plurality of link mechanisms (not deformed). Seki is a moving part Form that allows relative displacement by coupled linkage via a connected system) is deformed, and the form of a combination of each of these embodiments are illustrated by.

  In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and by a driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine B2 that is rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, each one end of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that combines linear motion and rotational motion, and to change the motion.

  Note that the distance from one end to the other end of the pair of arm members may be set to the same length, or may be set to different lengths.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a slide groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the slide groove. A pin portion to be formed is disposed, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and at least the arm member is at the reference position. In the disposed state, a gap is formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin part, so even if the arm member is stopped, the first member It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, an inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. Thus, a reciprocating displacement can be formed. As a result, the first member can be reciprocated (swayed) after stopping the displacement of the arm member.

  In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the arm member is reduced. When the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member after being stopped at the reference position, the gap between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion is A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape, so that after the reciprocation of the first member converges and stops, The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it can suppress that the 1st member evacuated to the evacuation position rattles by disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and by a driving force applied from the driving means. Rotating about the other end, the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed in the first member. Game machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, each one end of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that combines linear motion and rotational motion, and to change the motion.

  In this case, since the sliding groove is formed linearly and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove according to the rotation angle of the arm member ( (Inclination direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially C shape or in a straight line. Thereby, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of the inertial force, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape. The reciprocating motion can be quickly converged toward the center of the letter C while enabling the rotation component to be added to the movement, and when the sliding groove is arranged in a straight line, The movement can be only a linear component.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, a gap formed between one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion allows movement of the first member by the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7, which is arranged in a direction to play.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion is the first member by the action of gravity. Since the movement of the first member is arranged, in addition to the movement driven by the displacement of the arm member, the movement of the first member can be formed by the action of gravity without being moved by the movement of the arm member. . Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is coupled, a driven portion that is displaceably disposed on the main body portion, and a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine B8, comprising: second driving means for applying a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body part to which one end of the arm member is coupled, a driven part that is displaceably disposed on the main body part, Since the second driving means for applying a driving force to the driven part is provided, it is possible to produce an effect of relatively displacing the driven part with respect to the main body part by the driving force of the second driving means. In this case, since the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, the reaction force can form a displacement that reciprocates the pin portion toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. it can. As a result, the main body (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) in a state where the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means. In the state where the displacement of the member is stopped, when a reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body portion to displace the main body portion, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the main body portion.

  Examples of the shape of the driven part include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and a long shape. In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the driven part may be decentered from the center of rotation (position supported by the main body part). Thereby, the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit can be increased, and the variation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body unit.

  In the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is positioned between the pair of pin parts.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is located between the pair of pin parts, so that the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving part is reduced by the rotation of the main body part. It can be easily connected to movement.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10 includes a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B10, the second displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member. With this contact, both the movement of the first member and the change of the movement of the first member can be achieved. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member is displaced (reciprocated) by the inertial force generated when the arm member is stopped by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the first member. This can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, when the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member and the first member is bounced off, so that the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced or a mode in which the first member is displaced in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member.

  Further, when the first member includes the main body and the driven part, the second displacement member is kept in contact with the main body so that only the driven part is displaced while maintaining the main body in a stopped state. Can be made. That is, it is possible to form an aspect in which the main body part is displaced together with the driven part by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven part and an aspect in which only the driven part is displaced.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11 includes a second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and a magnet is disposed on one of the first member or the second displacement member, and the first member or the first member A magnet or an iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A gaming machine B12 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the gaming machine B12 includes the second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force acts between the magnet and the magnet or iron member disposed on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the movement of the first member is regulated by the action of the magnetic force, or The first member can be displaced. For example, after the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of magnetic force by moving the second displacement member close to and away from the first member. In addition, since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other.

<About the concept of the invention using the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In the gaming machine that allows the player to visually recognize the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is configured so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to be different from each other.

  Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer circumferential surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to be drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotating body is driven to rotate independently by the first driving motor (driving means), and the second rotating body is driven to rotate independently by the second driving motor, and the figure of the first rotating body visually recognized by the player. And the combination of the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the same number of drive motors as that of the rotating body are required, which increases the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means applies the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body is different from the rotating state of the second rotating body. Therefore, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed even with one driving means. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, as a different rotation state of one rotating body and the other rotating body, for example, a state in which the rotating speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated while the other rotating body is rotated. A state in which the rotating body is stopped is exemplified. The rotational speed need not be constant, and may be increased or decreased.

  Moreover, as a some figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotary body, a character, a design, a color, a pattern, or these combinations are illustrated, for example. In this case, the graphic may be a part of a character or design (one that combines with another graphic to form one character or design), or all (only the graphic forms one character or design). Stuff).

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. A rotation period and the rotation period of a 2nd rotary body can be varied. Therefore, even if it is one drive means, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body and the figure of the 2nd rotary body which a player visually recognizes can be changed.

  Moreover, since the transmission means is configured to vary the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the structure of the transmitting means can be simplified.

  Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism (gear transmission mechanism and chain transmission mechanism) that transmits rotation by meshing and a mechanism (friction transmission mechanism and belt transmission mechanism) that transmits rotation by friction. The gear transmission mechanism is a spur gear, worm and worm gear, bevel gear, or rack and pinion, the chain transmission mechanism is a chain and sprocket, the friction transmission mechanism is a friction gear, and the belt transmission mechanism is A pulley and a belt are illustrated respectively.

  In this case, the mechanism for transmitting the rotation with the above-described meshing between the rotation shaft of the first rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means and between the rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has its rotating shaft directly connected to the driving shaft of the driving means, and the first rotating body and A mechanism for transmitting rotation by meshing or a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be disposed between the other rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means. In the latter case, the number of parts (gears, etc.) for constituting a mechanism for transmitting rotation can be suppressed, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C2, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are in a state in which the other phase is shifted with respect to one phase at a visual recognition position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visible to the player. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by being stopped at

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the number of graphic combinations that can be displayed can be increased, and it is necessary to display a desired graphic combination. The number of rotations can be suppressed, and it can appear in a short time.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at a visual recognition position where the player can visually recognize the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface, the two rotating bodies are requested to have the same phase. As the number of possible figures decreases, the number of revolutions required to reveal the desired combination of figures increases (the table lengthens). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, the other phase is shifted from the one phase of both rotating bodies. Therefore, the number of combinations of figures that can be displayed can be increased, and the number of rotations required to display a desired combination of figures can be suppressed and the number of combinations can be displayed in a short time. it can.

  In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are curved in a circular arc shape protruding outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferred. Thereby, even when there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body stopped at the visual recognition position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means includes first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. And at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. And a non-engagement region that blocks transmission of rotation with non-engagement between the meshing region that transmits rotation and the other gear.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and the second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation and the other gear. A non-engagement region that interrupts transmission of rotation with non-engagement with the gear, so that one of the first and second rotating bodies is stopped while the other is rotated, and the first rotation A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even if it is one drive means, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body and the figure of the 2nd rotary body which a player visually recognizes can be changed.

  Further, in this way, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, stop one of the rotations, release the stop, and restart the rotation. The expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body can be enhanced.

  Both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region and a non-meshing region. May be provided. Thereby, it is possible to form a state where both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state where both stop, a state where one stops and the other rotates, and a state where one rotates and the other stops. .

  In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission unit or the second transmission unit includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is the first rotating body or A gaming machine C5, which is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes the gear having the meshing area and the non-meshing area, so that the driving means is driven. In this state, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, and the other is maintained in rotation. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region is set corresponding to the interval between the figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. The length of the table whose element is a combination with the figure of the second rotating body can be shortened. Therefore, the number of rotations of the first rotator and the second rotator required to reveal a desired combination of figures can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required for making a desired figure combination appear.

  In addition, the formation range of the non-engagement region is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface. One of the first rotation body and the second rotation body is determined by the non-engagement region. This means that the other is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1) while stopped. In particular, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because it is possible to minimize the number of revolutions necessary for making the desired table combination appear by minimizing the length of the table.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission means transmits a rotation in the positive direction of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a positive direction of the driving means. A reverse direction transmission means for transmitting rotation in the opposite direction opposite to the first rotation body and the second rotation body, and when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the forward rotation of the drive means The transmission to the direction transmission means is allowed, the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is interrupted, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation of the drive means is transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. A gaming machine C6 comprising switching means for blocking and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction in the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the switching means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the forward direction transmitting means. When the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is permitted and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means is blocked by the switching means. In addition, since transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is allowed, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation that the player visually recognizes when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction and when rotated in the reverse direction. Different types of combinations with body figures. In other words, two types of tables having the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements and changing to the rotation direction of the driving means can arbitrarily select these two types of tables. can do.

  As the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure described in the gaming machine C2 or C3 (structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different), the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-engagement region), and the first structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. Any one of the three structures can be selected.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission unit and the reverse direction transmission unit. For example, when the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the case where the second structure is selected is exemplified. In the former case, the rotation ratio is different between the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means. In the latter case, the meshing area and the non-meshing area are different between the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means. The formation ratio of is different. Even in this case, two types of tables having the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements are selected, and the two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected by changing the rotation direction of the driving means. Can be possible.

  Further, the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means are rotated in the reverse direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, the same direction is preferable. This is because it can be made difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the direction of rotation of the driving means.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine includes light emitting means disposed in at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and an outer periphery of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine C7, wherein at least a part of the surface is formed of a light-transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since at least part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light transmissive material, the first The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed in at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means may be always emitted or may be emitted under a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, when the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body form a specific combination, when one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped, the stop For example, when rotation is resumed before or after stopping.

  In the gaming machine C7, the outer surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated through the open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine C8, comprising a container that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the board.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the first rotation is formed through the open portion of the front surface, and the first rotation body and the second rotation body are accommodated while the front surface is formed in an open box shape. Since the player is provided with a container that allows the player to visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means in a different manner from the case where the light emitted from the light emitting means is directly visually recognized. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the inner wall surface of the container and visually recognized by the player, or the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall portion of the container to irradiate a predetermined object. Examples include a mode in which a player visually recognizes a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the wall portion of the container, and a predetermined part (for example, an end surface of the front surface) of the container is emitted. The

  In addition, each said aspect, for example, the specific figure of the several figures drawn in at least one of the 1st rotary body or the 2nd rotary body is the back side (namely, the 1st rotary body or the 2nd rotary body). It is preferably executed when the player is placed at a position that is not visible to the player. A specific figure arranged at a position invisible to the player is associated with the player as the light emitting means emits light (the first rotary body or the second rotary body is placed so that the specific figure is visible). This is because it can be expected to be rotated). In particular, the light emission of the light emitting means is preferably executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C8, a storage body in which the first rotary body and the second rotary body are stored, an effect position and a game in which the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be visually recognized by the player. And a moving means for moving between a retreat position that cannot be visually recognized by a person.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the container in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are players. Since the moving means for moving between the effect position visible from the player and the retreat position not visible from the player is provided, a desired combination of the combination of the first rotary figure and the second rotary figure is selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the required timing.

  That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body relatively much in order to bring out a desired combination, and the time is increased. However, the moving means causes the first rotating body and the second rotating body to rotate. Since the body can be moved from the player to a retreat position that cannot be visually recognized, the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotational position at the retreat position. When the required timing arrives, the moving means can move the first rotating body and the second rotating body to the effect position, and a desired combination can be quickly displayed.

  The gaming machine C9 is provided with operating means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the operating means is operated at the retracted position. Characteristic gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated when they are arranged at the retracted position and the operating means is operated. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance at the retracted position, the player can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the first rotating body and the player cannot be visually recognized by being moved to the retracted position, There is a possibility that the player may recognize the rotation by the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, since the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be performed by being mixed into the operation of the operating means, it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. it can.

  Examples of the operation means include a payout device and a sound generation device. That is, in a state where the game medium is paid out by the payout device, a relatively loud sound is generated with the game medium payout operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like. The same applies to the state where sound is generated from the sound generator. Alternatively, or in addition thereto, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated when a predetermined display is performed on the display device. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like.

<About the concept of the invention taking LED 344 as an example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of an outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means disposed in the rotating body, and the rotation In a gaming machine including a body that is rotatably accommodated and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body through an open portion of the front surface, light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted from the rotating body. A gaming machine D1 in which light transmitted from an outer wall is reflected by the container and visually recognized by a player.

  Here, a rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a light emitting unit disposed inside the rotating body, 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably accommodated, and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013) -220215 gazette). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light of the light emitting means passes through the outer wall of the rotating body viewed from the open portion of the front surface of the container and is only directly recognized by the player. There was a problem that the light effect was not effectively demonstrated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player, the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is The player can visually recognize the light in a mode different from the case of directly viewing, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material and a transmission portion that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a material that can reflect light. And a reflecting part for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting part and the reflecting part at the time of rotation of the rotating body define an irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine D2 that is allowed to pass.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, on the outer wall of the rotating body, a transmission part that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A reflecting portion that reflects the inside of the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means And a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. Can be switched with the rotation. That is, two light emission forms can be formed by only one light emitting means. For example, the position of light visually recognized by the player is switched to at least two places without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, it is possible to effectively exhibit the light effect while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

  In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is disposed in a posture to irradiate light toward an open portion of the front surface of the container.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture to irradiate light toward the open portion of the front surface of the container, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be emitted. In a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, the light can be made visible to the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front surface of the container, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected In a form in which the light is reflected by the part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is made invisible from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front surface of the container. The player can visually recognize the rotating body. Thereby, along with the rotation of the rotating body, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be greatly different, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section, so that the apparent rotating body appears as the rotating body rotates. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is visible to the player around the rotating body, the light is The size of the visually recognized area can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body juxtaposed in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively A gaming machine D5, which is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged substantially parallel to the first rotating body. Since the rotator and the second rotator are each formed as a triangular prism having a triangular cross-section, the gap between the first rotator and the second rotator (with the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator) ( The facing distance can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion, then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is transmitted from the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When making a player visually recognize, the magnitude | size of the area | region where light is visually recognized can be increased / decreased with rotation of a rotary body, As a result, the effect effect of light can be exhibited effectively.

  In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the reflecting portion disposed on an inner surface of an outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surfaces of the substantially triangular cross section. A gaming machine D6, wherein the transmission portions are disposed on the respective outer walls forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed on the inner surface of the outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflection part is provided and the transmission part is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. In this case, light can be transmitted to the outside from the two outer surfaces (transmission portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different locations on the inner wall surface of the container so that the player can visually recognize the light, or the light transmitted from one transmitting portion can be directly viewed by the player and transmitted from the other transmitting portion. The reflected light can be reflected by the inner wall surface of the container and made visible to the player, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D6, the container is formed in a box-like body whose front surface is open, and a reflection portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is formed on the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body. A gaming machine D7, which is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the container is formed in a box-like body whose front surface is open, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body is made of a material that can reflect light. Since the reflection part to be formed is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the first rotator and the second rotator, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. Next, the player reflects the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D7, the container is capable of reflecting light to an inner wall surface on a side surface of the box-shaped body and facing in parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflecting portion formed of a simple material is provided.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7, the container is an inner wall surface on the side surface of the box-shaped body, and faces the rotation axis of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in parallel. Since the inner wall surface is provided with a reflecting portion made of a material that can reflect light, the light reflected by the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected by the inner wall surface on the side surface and visually recognized by the player. In addition, the light transmitted from the transmission part can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface of the container and made visible to the player. As a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

<Feature E group> (AQ mode)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that executes determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed on the display unit In a gaming machine having dynamic display means and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information. The identification information is configured to display a determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and a first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and the first rotating body. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a first gaming state and a first game state thereof Second game different from the game state If the first gaming state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the states and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is indicated by a combination of the identification information When the second game state is set, the setting is switched between the combination of identification information and the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display unit so as to show the determination result by the determination unit. A gaming machine E1 having switching setting means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of displaying a symbol by a combination of a plurality of symbols by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbol on a liquid crystal screen. It has been proposed (for example, JP 2008-23040 A). However, even in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that only a game in which a rotating body is always rotated to display a symbol is performed, and the player becomes bored. The gaming machine E1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display means capable of displaying the target, and when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, The identification information is configured to display the determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and a first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface And a symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the first rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a first gaming state And the first game state is different from the first When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the gaming state and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is obtained by a combination of the identification information. When the second gaming state is set, the setting is switched between the combination of identification information and the combination of symbols displayed by the symbol display unit so as to indicate the determination result by the determination unit. And a switching setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine E1 has variable means for changing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a first position where the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visible and a second position where the first rotating body is less visible than the first position. When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are located at the second position more than when the second gaming state is set. The game machine E2 is characterized by being easily variable.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the variable means based on the gaming state.

  Thereby, since it becomes possible to assume a game state with the position of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body is a specific combination, the display means has an effect executing means for executing a specific effect. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to execute an effect based on the combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. The symbol display means and the display means can associate the effects, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has drive transmission means for transmitting a driving force for rotating the first rotation and the second rotation body, and the drive transmission means includes the first rotation body and the second rotation body. A gaming machine E4, wherein the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the drive transmitting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, an acquisition unit that acquires information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition unit, and the acquisition unit acquired by the acquisition unit until at least the determination condition is satisfied A storage unit that stores information, a pre-determination unit that executes determination before the determination condition is satisfied, and the second gaming state for the information stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine comprising: determining means for determining a combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body based on a determination result of the prior determination means. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body is determined based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the time until the determined symbol combination is displayed is secured. can do.

  Thus, for example, it is possible to provide an effect to the player using the time until display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the combination of symbols determined by the determination unit is determined, before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination unit is started And a pre-rotation means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, by a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are displayed until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination unit is started. Can be rotated by a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to reliably display the combination of symbols determined by the determining means.

<Feature F group> (Volume is displayed during the demonstration)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for executing the determination, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the sound based on the effect executed by the effect execution means are output. In the gaming machine having the sound output means, the operation means operable by the player, and the volume setting means for setting the volume based on the operation of the operation means, the effect executing means A gaming machine F1 comprising: a setting unit that sets an operation by the operation unit to be valid when the production period is a specific period.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes an audio output device and is capable of setting a sound volume for a game effect or the like (for example, JP-A-2005-237647). . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only in a state where the effect based on the game is not executed, and when the effect based on the game is executed, an unintended sound volume is output. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can play a game at a player's favorite volume.

  According to the gaming machine F1, it is executed by the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. A gaming machine having sound output means for outputting sound based on performance, operation means operable by a player, and volume setting means for setting sound volume based on operation of the operation means And setting means for setting the operation by the operation means to be effective in a specific period of the period during which the effect is being executed by the effect executing means. Thereby, volume adjustment can be performed appropriately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play with the player's favorite volume.

  In the gaming machine F1, effect determining means for determining the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining means, A gaming machine F2 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, a specific period can be set based on the content of the production, so the volume can be set within a range that does not impede the production, and the production effect is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress damage.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period in which an operation by the operation means is set to be effective when an effect is not executed for a predetermined period by the effect executing means. Machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to set the volume even when the production is not executed for a predetermined period by the production execution means. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a display unit that displays an effect mode by the effect execution unit and a setting mode that indicates that the specific period is set by the setting unit are displayed on the display unit. A gaming machine F4, comprising: setting mode display control means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the period during which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period during which the player can set the volume can be easily It can be grasped and the player can easily set the volume.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed by the effect execution unit for the predetermined period, the determination information notification unit that notifies the determination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting unit. A gaming machine F5 characterized by having the following.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed for a predetermined time by the effect executing means, the set volume is notified, so that the player It is possible to easily determine whether or not the sound volume should be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the game machine has a prohibiting unit that prohibits the setting unit from setting the operation unit to be effective based on the determination result determined by the determination unit. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, it is prohibited to set the operation means to be effective. The determination result of the determination means can be grasped by the operation for setting the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that dynamically displays identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information is specific to the determination It is composed of at least a first symbol indicating a result and a second symbol indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result, and the setting mode displays the second symbol in a variable manner. A gaming machine F7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect execution means, and at least the first design indicating the specific determination result is different from the specific determination result. Among the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating the second symbol, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereby, the 2nd design which shows that it is a judgment result different from a specific judgment result can be used for setting of a volume. Therefore, it is possible to effectively use the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when the specific period is set, the game machine has a luminance variable unit that varies the luminance of the display unit based on an operation of the operation unit. A gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when a specific period is set, the luminance of the display unit is varied by the luminance varying unit based on the operation of the operating unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play with the player's favorite brightness.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, acquisition means for acquiring information used for determination of the determination condition based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and acquisition by the acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied A storage unit that stores the information; a pre-determination unit that determines the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied; and a determination result by the pre-determination unit. Determination means for determining establishment, and the setting means, when the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least the specific period determined by the prior determination means Until the performance corresponding to is executed, the operation of the operation means is set to be effective.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are produced. That is, information used for determination by the determination unit is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The storage means stores the acquired information until at least a determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is determined by prior determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting unit effectively sets the operation of the operation unit until an effect corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination unit is executed.

  Thus, the period from when the information is determined by the prior determination means to when the effect corresponding to the information is executed can be set as a period during which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a favorite sound volume corresponding to the effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

<Feature group G> (Fish school customization settings)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a dynamic display unit that displays the identification information displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a target display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, by a player's operation Operation means capable of inputting game information, storage means capable of storing game information input by the operation means, and the determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed Prior display means for displaying the prior information based on the determination result on the display means, and prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the determination result , Setting means for setting a ratio selected between the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result for the specific prior information determined by the prior information determination means And a ratio determining means for determining a ratio set by the setting means based on the game information stored in the storage means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game lottery is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). However, with this type of pachinko machine, it is difficult to provide a game machine that matches the player's preference because the expectation level of the production cannot be set according to the player's individual preference. was there. The gaming machine G1 has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that matches the player's preference.

  According to the gaming machine G1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that executes determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and the identification displayed on the display unit A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information; and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed. An operation means capable of inputting game information by a user's operation, a storage means capable of storing game information input by the operation means, and a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, Pre-display means for displaying the pre-information based on the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and pre-information determination for determining the content of the pre-information displayed by the pre-display means based on the determination result And a setting means for setting a probability that the specific prior information that can be determined is determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the prior information determination means, and the setting means Probability determining means for determining the probability set by the above-mentioned game information stored in the storage means. Thereby, the expectation degree which prior information shows can be varied according to a player's liking. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that matches the player's preference.

  In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 indicates that the specific prior information notifies a player of an expectation level indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the expectation degree indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific prior information. Therefore, according to the player's preference There is an effect that the production can be set in more detail.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the game information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation, so that the game machine G3 produces more details according to the player's preference. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the counter unit capable of repeatedly updating the counter value within a predetermined range, and the acquisition of the counter value counted by the counter unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition And the specific prior information is determined in the range of the counter value when the determination result is a specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result, respectively. A value is set, and the prior information determination means is the specific prior information when the counter value acquired by the acquisition means is one of the determination values set in the specific prior information. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the game machine G4 is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the counter value is repeatedly updated within a predetermined range by the counter means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the counter value counted by the counter unit is acquired by the acquiring unit. The specific prior information is acquired by the acquisition unit with the determination value set in the range of the counter value in each of the case where the determination result is the specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific advance information, the specific advance information is determined. Thereby, there exists an effect that control can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G4, the ratio setting means sets a range of the determination value to be set based on the gaming information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, since the range of the determination value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, there is an effect that the determination value can be set more easily.

<Feature H group> (control to divide the region of the touch detection position)
An effect execution means for executing an effect, a detection means capable of detecting a player's operation operation in a non-contact manner, and when the operation action is detected by the detection means, the effect execution means performs a specific effect. In the gaming machine having the effect varying means for executing the second detection means, the detection means includes a first detection area capable of detecting the operation action and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that can be changed to a prohibition position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection area and a permission position that allows the shared detection area to be formed, and Variable control means for variably controlling a variable member between the prohibition position and the permission position; and discrimination means for discriminating which of the first detection area and the second detection area is detected by the detection means; When the variable member is varied at the prohibited position, the effect varying means determines the determination result detected by either the first detection area or the second detection area by the determination means. Based on the above, the gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it can be changed to the corresponding specific production.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball to the start port A game lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a means of changing the production by the player's operation, a gaming machine that arranges a touch sensor that can be input by the player with a finger or the like, and the player performs a touch operation to switch the production etc. It has been proposed (for example, JP 2009-219617 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a more suitable game using an input means such as a touch sensor has been demanded. It is an object to provide a suitable gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the operation is detected by the effect executing means for executing the effect, the detecting means capable of detecting the player, and the detecting means, a specific effect is provided by the effect executing means. Effect variable means to be executed, wherein the detection means has at least a first detection area in which a player can be detected and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. And a variable member that can be changed to a prohibition position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection area and a permission position that permits the formation of the shared detection area, and the variable member is prohibited from being formed. Variable control means for variably controlling the position and the permitted position, and determination means for determining whether the first detection area or the second detection area is detected by the detection means. The means If it is variable in position on the basis of the discrimination result by the discriminating means, but for varying the specific effect that the corresponding.

  Accordingly, since the variable member prohibits the formation of the shared detection region, the region detected by the detection unit can be varied by the operation of the variable member, and the detection unit can be used functionally. . Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable gaming machine can be provided.

  The gaming machine H1 has display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, the variable member is arranged to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the detection means A gaming machine H2 having the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the variable member is varied on the front side of the display means, so that it is possible to notify the player of the detection area at the position of the variable member, making it easier to understand. A game can be performed. Furthermore, the player can select the effects displayed on the display means, and there is an effect that various effects can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H2, when the variable member is at the permission position, the effect execution means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area, and when the variable member is at the prohibited position. The game machine H3 is characterized in that a second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to each of the first detection area and the second detection area.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when in the permitted position, and the first detection area and the second detection area when in the prohibited position. Since each of the second effects is displayed, the effective detection area can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that an effect fused with the effect displayed on the display means can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode in which the player selects either the display mode displayed in the first detection area or the display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the player can select and operate according to the selection display mode, and can be more involved in the game and can improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means has at least first detection means for setting a first detection area and second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means includes a first detection means for setting the first detection area and a second detection means for setting the second detection area. Therefore, there is an effect that the first detection region and the second detection region can be detected independently.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection means targets an output unit capable of outputting infrared rays to the first detection region and the second detection region, and the infrared rays output from the output unit are targets. A gaming machine H6 having at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared rays reflected by an object.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection area and the second detection area are detected by infrared rays. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress malfunctions.

<Characteristic group I> (Increase in swing width of swinging object, suppression control)
A swing member configured to be swingable, swing means for swinging the swing member by operating in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the swing member; A state discriminating unit capable of discriminating whether the member is moving in the first direction or the second direction, and a swing for controlling the swinging unit based on a determination result by the state discriminating unit A gaming machine I1 having control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball to the start port A game lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In an effect indicating a lottery of a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable accessory provided on a game board is moved to execute a notice effect that informs a player in advance of information related to the result of determination of success / failure (for example, JP, 2010-094348, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there are restrictions on the size of the game board surface, the power that can be used, and the like, and the number of movable means such as a motor for moving the movable accessory is limited and can be moved. There is a problem that the operation is restricted, the production is restricted, and the fun of the game is lowered. The present gaming machine has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the swing member configured to be swingable, and the swing that swings by operating the effect member in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. Based on the determination result by the state determination means and the state determination means capable of determining in which direction of the first direction and the second direction the rotation member is moved. Swing control means for controlling the means.

  Thereby, the swing of the swing member can be easily controlled. Therefore, the game control process can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine I1, a state setting unit capable of setting a first state in which the swinging member is swung and a second state in which the swinging of the swinging member is suppressed, and the state setting unit can set the first state. And a means for controlling the swinging means by the swing control means to operate the swinging member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means based on the setting of one state. A gaming machine I2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swinging member is set by the state setting means, the direction is the same as the direction determined by the state determination means. Since the swing member is controlled by the swing control means to operate the swing member, there is an effect that the swing of the swing member can be continued.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the swing member includes a displaceable displacement member and a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable with the displaceable member, and the displaceable members are displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3, comprising a pair of possible arm members, wherein the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the first member and the displacement member are relatively displaced, the displacement width of the swing member can be further increased, and the production can be dynamically performed. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swinging means. Is rotated around the other end.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3, the other end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable is rotatably supported and provided from the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated around the other end by the driving force, there is an effect that the swinging can be continued and the production can be performed for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine I3 or I4, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is disposed, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member and sliding on the other of the arm member or the first member. A pin portion formed so as to be slidable along the groove is disposed, and the sliding groove has at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove in a state where the arm member is disposed at the reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin portion and the pin portion, there is an effect that friction when swinging can be reduced and damping of swinging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determination unit includes an acceleration sensor disposed on the swing member, and determines the state of the swing member based on information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state of the swing member is determined by the state determination unit based on information output from the acceleration sensor disposed on the swing member. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing control can be executed in accordance with the state of the swing member.

<Feature J group> (Pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. And the effect content determination means for determining the effect content, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotator, respectively, and the figure is combined with the effect content determined by the effect content determination means. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, and each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first position at which the player can easily see the figure, and a first position thereof. The rotation control means is configured to be variable to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and the rotation control means displays the combination of the figures indicating the contents of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. 2nd place And rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount, respectively, and then changing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to the first position, respectively. A gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball to the start port A game lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect showing a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel showing a plurality of symbols is rotated a plurality of times, and a lottery result is notified by a combination of symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2004). -160759). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (the rotation until the symbol to be stopped is positioned in front is determined by the size of the reel, the number of symbols to be displayed, etc. (Time) becomes longer and the time until the lottery result is displayed becomes longer, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game fun.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the driving means, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the first rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmission means and having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Rotation body and second rotator, effect content determining means for determining effect content, and the content of effect determined by the effect content determining means by controlling rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator respectively. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the first rotation body and the second rotation body. It is configured to be variable to one position and a second position where it is harder to visually recognize the figure than the first position, and the rotation control means is a combination of the figures indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means Show When the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to a predetermined amount at the second position, respectively, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the first position, respectively. It is variable.

  Thereby, an arbitrary figure can be quickly displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the graphic is displayed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the rotation control means can control the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. And whether to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction or the second direction, respectively, based on the contents of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. A gaming machine J2 having rotation direction determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are determined between the first direction and the second direction based on the content of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. Since the rotation direction determining means determines which to rotate, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the position corresponding to the effect, and the rotation time can be shortened. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the transmission means at different rotation ratios. Since the second rotating body can be rotated with respect to the body at different periods, there is an effect that the combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be displayed in various ways efficiently.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, A gaming machine K1 that is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, A gaming machine K3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
600 Left / right sensor device (detection means)
400 Central floating unit (variable member)
S1 irradiation area (first detection area)
S2 irradiation area (second detection area)
S1315 Production variable means S2003 Variable control means S2005 A part of discrimination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down is provided with a start opening through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period.

JP 2009-219617 A

  However, in this type of pachinko machine, a more suitable game has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a more suitable game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an effect execution means for executing an effect, a detection means capable of detecting a player's operation operation in a non-contact manner, and the operation by the detection means. An effect variable means for causing the effect executing means to execute a specific effect when an action is detected, and the detecting means detects a first detection area capable of detecting the operation action and the first detection area. At least a second detection area including a shared detection area, and a prohibited position for prohibiting the formation of the shared detection area, and an allowed position for allowing the shared detection area to be formed. A variable member that can be changed to variable, a variable control means that variably controls the variable member to the prohibition position and the permission position, and the detection by either the first detection area or the second detection area Detected by means Determining means for determining whether the variable member is variable at the prohibited position, and the effect changing means is configured to determine the first detection area and the second detection area by the determining means. Based on the discrimination result detected by either of the above, the corresponding specific effects are varied.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of detecting a player's operation operation in a non-contact manner, and the operation means detected by the detecting means. In this case, there is an effect variable means for causing the effect execution means to execute a specific effect, and the detection means is a first detection area in which the operation operation can be detected and a part of the first detection area. At least a second detection area including a shared detection area, and changing between a prohibited position where the shared detection area is prohibited and a permitted position where the shared detection area is allowed to be formed A variable member that can be detected, a variable control unit that variably controls the variable member to the prohibited position and the permitted position, and whether the first detection region or the second detection region is detected by the detection unit. Determine And when the variable member is changed to the prohibited position, the effect changing means is either the first detection area or the second detection area by the determination means. On the basis of the discrimination result detected in the above, the corresponding specific effects are varied. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable game can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotary body lifting / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st rotary body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a front view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st member. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st member. It is a front view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central idler unit disposed at the lowered position. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central idler unit disposed at the lowered position. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, and (c) is an XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41 (b). It is a cross-sectional back view of the center floating unit and left-right rotation unit in a line. (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLIIb-XLIIb line | wire of Fig.42 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of Fig.43 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left-right sensor device taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLVb-XLVb line | wire of Fig.45 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the plate glass of a glass unit. (A) is a side view of the container in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow XLVIIb direction view of Fig.47 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. (A) is a side view of the container in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow LIb direction view of Fig.51 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a), and (c) is FIG. 56 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left and right rotating unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left and right rotating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows a frame button typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows a selection switch typically. It is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the display screen in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in a 1st control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first per-random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the first per-count counter CS2 and the jackpot type It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 and the determination value per normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of departure (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of departure (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table A in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table B in a 1st control example. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table C in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fish notice selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the shaking motion table in a 1st control example. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the volume setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the left-right selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the shake control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation control processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special SW effect control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the content of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part of. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the reel control processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 3rd control example. It is a timing chart which showed the timing which performs time production in the example of the 3rd control. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in period A1 of FIG. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production | presentation screen displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the period B of FIG. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production screen of the shaking production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) shows typically the content of RAM of the main controller in a 3rd control example. It is a figure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the rotary body operation | movement table in a 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the dog breed selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the figure which showed typically the shaking operation | movement table 2 in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect change process at the time of winning performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch reel display effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the shaking control process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the reel scenario table in a 3rd control example.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a third winning port 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the third winning port 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball has won the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball has won the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means a game state in which a ball is likely to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time to be changed is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are in an opened state (open state), the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are closed (closed state). Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, it becomes easier to win the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  Note that the opening time of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or changed during the probability change or in the short time. In addition to changing the time, it is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time as compared with normal time. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened for the first time or per time. The number of times of opening the electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82 may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal case.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B triggered by any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 (starting winning). While synchronizing, the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage as a trigger.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central idler unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so that they are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Accordingly, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the probability of hitting is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a per hit, When the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the short time, the time required to display the variation of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls to be retained for the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. A third winning opening 82 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second prize opening switch is turned on. Accordingly, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a big win lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first winning slot 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second winning slot 640 and the third winning slot 82 are as follows. Different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82 May be configured as five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, 1 The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the second winning combination 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, 2 The electric accessory 82a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 during the probability change or the shorter time than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 is a high probability even in a low probability state. The situation is the same. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball hits the first prize slot 64 when the ball wins the second prize slot 640 and the third prize slot 82. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. A ball is fired so as to pass the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning port 64 without an electric accessory (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning port 64 It is advantageous for a player to obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities and aim to win a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the second through gate 67 makes it easy for the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 to be in an open state, and wins the third winning opening 82. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the third prize opening 82 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the second through gate 67 is passed It is advantageous for the player to place the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and aim for a 15R probability variation big hit by winning the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  In addition to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may be selected by a lottery for a symbol different from the second symbol when a ball passes. By the lottery of the symbol, the second electric combination 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the balls passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric combination that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 and opened. Will be selected one by one.

  Thus, for example, if the second electric combination 82a is opened when a winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn, When winning is selected for the two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is selected and the second symbol When winning is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, a gaming state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened can be obtained.

  Therefore, if the gaming state is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the probability change, and the gaming state is easy to hit a symbol different from the second symbol during the short time, the second through gate 67 is hit right during the probability changing. The game state is such that the second electric combination 82a is opened by allowing the ball to pass and the ball is easy to win, and during the time, the left electric strike is passed through the first through gate 66 and the first electric combination is released to win the ball. It is possible to make it easy to play. For this reason, the game state during normal, short time, and probability change can be changed to different game states, so that the player can entertain each game state.

  In addition, when the second electric combination 82a is opened when the winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is selected and a winning symbol is selected for a symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released, and when the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is displayed. Is selected, and when the winning pattern is selected for the second symbol, a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened can be made.

  In this case, regardless of whether the probability is changing or when the time is short, when the player hits right and the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the first electric combination is released, and the gaming state is such that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. When the ball is left-handed and the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter the third winning port 82 can be achieved. Therefore, the player needs to change how to strike from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game because the player can change the way to hit at any time.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 64, and the third winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (variation time) is obtained. After the elapse, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes a switch (sensor) for detecting the winning of the ball at each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that the ball has passed through various gates, and a switch (sensor) for detecting fraud. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a group of switches (sensors) used for various effects and various variable members (movable accessories). These are connected to various switches comprising a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the operation, motors comprising drive motors 420, 530, 630, etc. for driving various variable members (movable accessories). The other device 228 includes a drive motor.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  7 shows a state in which the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is placed in the lowered position, the central idler unit 400 is in the raised position, and the left / right rotary unit 500 is in the retracted position. In FIG. A state in which the unit 300 is disposed at the raised position, the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, and the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the rotary body lifting unit 300 and the central idler are provided above and below the inner space of the back case 210. Each unit 400 is disposed, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and left and right sensor devices 600 are disposed on the left and right sides of the central floating unit 400.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) box-shaped housings 330 arranged in the width direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) each housed in each of the housings 330. ) Rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be movable up and down independently in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Is done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the housing 330, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let In addition, the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are formed as a columnar body of a cross-sectional triangle, and a different figure is each drawn on three surfaces of an outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotator 340a and the second rotator are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

  The central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 that are pivotally supported by the base body 410 so that the base end side is rotatable, and a distal end side opposite to the base end side of the pair of arm bodies 430. The first member 440 is connected to each other so as to be relatively displaceable (see FIG. 23).

  The pair of arm bodies 430 are respectively driven by separate drive motors 450 and formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. Thus, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear lift along the vertical direction, but also in a mode combining a linear motion and a rotational motion, and can be lifted up and down while incorporating the motion, The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). Details will be described later.

  The left and right rotating unit 500 includes a base (a rear base 511 and a front base 512) disposed on the front surfaces of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body lifting unit 300 and the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410. The base end side is provided with the displacement member 530 pivotally supported rotatably (refer FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and an overhang position (see FIG. 7) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacement member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position, so that the displacement member 530 is in contact with the first member 440 so that its movement can be restricted (see FIG. 41). Details will be described later.

  The left / right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 is formed.

  The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotary body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210. The In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward. Accordingly, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edges of the openings (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be made difficult.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 46, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central idler unit 400, the left and right rotating unit 500, and the left and right sensor device 600 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22, a detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300 </ b> C for elevating and lowering the central container 330, and a left unit 300 </ b> L and a right unit 300 </ b> R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is overlaid on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300 </ b> C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The disposed drive motor 320, the housing 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340 a and the first rotating body 340 housed in the housing 330. The two-rotary body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposed surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300 </ b> C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate member, the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side, and the housing 330 is disposed on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts project from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting member 325 (rack gear 324) is arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As the rack gear 324 moves linearly, the housing 330 is displaced (moved up and down) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically long portion where the container 330 is disposed with the horizontally long portion between the lower ends thereof. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, even when the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position with the left container 330 disposed at the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide comprising a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a slide body formed so as to be slidable along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. The slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail and the second rail, the first rail fixed to the back surface base 311, the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and both of them. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism comprising an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left container 330 is arranged in parallel to the side of the central container 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 12). ) Longer dimensions. Furthermore, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is disposed on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the central container 330 by restricting the shaking in the left-right direction by the extended slide guide 352. On the other hand, in a state where the central container 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300 </ b> L includes a rear base 313 that is formed in a vertically long front view and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 </ b> C. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 Is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 fixed coaxially to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack that is geared on the side surface of a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, the intermediate base 314 is provided with a shaft support hole, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole so as to be rotatable.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. The guide plate 353 is provided with a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-like opening, extending in the vertical direction. In this guide groove 353a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is interposed via a collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 becomes the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As a result of the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (lifted / lowered) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shape on the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the back and forth base 316 and the front base 317 are raised and lowered by the driving force of the drive motor 320. Housing 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. A transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a plate-like member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 is formed as a rack whose side surfaces are chopped, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . The front base 316 is provided with a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, extending in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is colored in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316 a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324 is performed. Accordingly, the housing 330 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, the rack gears 323 are provided at positions close to the side surfaces of the left housing 330 and the right housing 330, so that the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The horizontal dimension) can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the posture of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (left and right direction and difficult to shake).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and guidance by the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the guide plate 353 or the back base 316 is provided. Can sufficiently stabilize the posture. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. 18A and 18B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331 are formed, and these portions 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (FIG. 18B, the back side of the paper), the top surface, and the bottom surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the housing 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. Are integrally formed. A reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and has a size that protrudes at least in the vertical direction from both of the rotary bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-like members that form the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 in a non-rotatable manner. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which the axial cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface thereof is a shape obtained by removing one of the circles by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-like member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. The partition wall 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

  The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the container 330, and is formed in a front-view frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The container 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b that are rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 320, and a drive. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 that is meshed with the drive gear 351, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355. The gear train which consists of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b is demonstrated. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  In addition, since the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are substantially the same structures except the point from which the figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface differs, below, the 1st rotary body 340a is a typical example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 that are rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and the pair of end face plates 342a. Three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) provided between the end face plates 342 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and shaft portions 341b provided continuously at both axial ends of the body portion 341a. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  The shaft portion 341b has a shape obtained by removing one of the circular straight cross-sectional shapes of the circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder with a plane). The shape is slightly similar to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333. Therefore, the shaft 341b is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333, so that the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the container 330 (side walls 332 and 333) in a non-rotatable manner.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held unrotatable, the trunk portion 341b changes the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing 330 (decorative body 335). Are disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate disposed on the front surface (a “visual position” described later) of the container 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  The fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having both ends opened in the axial direction. Therefore, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed using such an internal space, and the wiring is pivoted. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the end in the direction. In addition, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot be rotated with respect to the housing 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, the fixed shaft 341 has a body 341b having a larger diameter than the shaft 341a. Therefore, the end plate 342 is disposed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 to be described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Note that the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 to the second rotating body 340b, but mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively. It spans between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end face plates 342.

  Each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C has a figure drawn on the outer surface thereof. Therefore, when the triangular prismatic body is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as described later, each display board 343A can be used even when there is a shift of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the graphic drawn on the outer surface of ˜343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, when the fixed shaft 341 is viewed in the axial direction, the end portions in the width direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape protruding outward, A central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). Is set to:

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “viewing position”, and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position at which a graphic drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “shielding position”.

  Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prism is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position, and the second display board 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are disposed at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transmissive portions PN capable of transmitting light. Is formed in part. In addition, a reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position where the inner surface of the display panel disposed at the visual recognition position among the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in the state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directly visible to the player through the transmission part PN of each of the display boards 343B and 343C. Can be made.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected on the reflection portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. And reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 of the container 330, and reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 is reflected by the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the first display panel 343A is arranged at the viewing position, and the LED 344 emits light, so that the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C arrange | positioned at the position (shielding position) which cannot be visually recognized from the player can be made to associate. Thereby, a player can be expected or suggested that the 1st rotary body 340a rotates to the position where the figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C becomes visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section. Therefore, when each of the rotators 340a and 340b is rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (display panels 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (FIG. 18 (b) vertical distance), or The apparent diameter (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) of each rotator 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotator 340a, 340b is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN is reflected on the player who visually recognizes the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base body 441. The mode (for example, the size of the region where light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  Returning to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 and having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 including a detection plate 363a that projects outward in the direction is provided, and a sensor device 364 that detects the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 in a state where a detection region is disposed on the movement locus of the detection plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detected object of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b through the transmission mechanism, and both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the 2nd rotary body 340b rotates in the same direction as the 1st rotary body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the number of combinations of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by one drive motor, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display board 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two-rotary body 340a is arranged at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotary body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotary body 340a are at the display position. There were only three combinations of the second combination to be arranged, the third combination of the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are independently rotated by different drive motors, up to nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations Can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts is increased by the amount of two drive motors required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to one, and the combinations are Can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations can be quickly displayed by not requiring a perfect match between the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display board 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the sign “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is disposed on the display position is indicated by a symbol “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position is indicated by a reference symbol “C” or “C ′”. Is done.

  For example, in FIG. 10 "A, C '" indicates that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotator 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions, respectively. The figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343 </ b> A to the third display plate 343 </ b> C of the first rotating body 340 a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values for the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 that are fixed to each other. In this embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. To be formed.

  No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 20). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the two rotating bodies 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the second display boards of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the graphics drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so that a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C in front view It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  No. in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 2 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is disposed at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotational angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player recognizes a graphic shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 9 and the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body The rotation position 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to recognize a graphic shift (no combination is established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed at the viewing position. No. 20 No. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display panel 343C at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section in which the figure shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is combined in the third combination.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described mode (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21A of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22E of FIG. 20). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 11-No. 20 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′, B "), the fifth combination (No. 12" B ', C "in Fig. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in Fig. 20).

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. 30 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′, FIG. C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the 1st rotary body 340a and the rotation period of the 2nd rotary body 340b can be varied. As a result, even if only one drive motor 350 is used, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

  In addition, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced and the durability and reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, the table in FIG. 20 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), and sections (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which a graphic shift (combination of combinations) is formed. Then, after the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears or just before it appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby producing an effect of causing the player to expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination appears in addition to the table in FIG. 20 in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). To the 9th combination. That is, in the former case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a needs to be repeated 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed once. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, in the case of setting to “1 / integer” times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can do. However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”), and the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, the number of figures that can be combined is nine. This means that the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotator 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotator 340b cannot be achieved simply by forming it as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, it is at the rotational position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing the difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of the presentation effect by the increase in the number of figures which can be combined, the required number of the drive motor 350 can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, combinations of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that cause a difference (shift) in a predetermined rotation angle at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C” and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotator 340b is delayed, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, the rotation is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b so as to be inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B” and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20), As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b so as to be inconspicuous.

  As described above, the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is formed such that each of the storage bodies 300 can be moved up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by being positioned on the back of the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b can be quickly displayed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b comparatively much, and time increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to positions that cannot be seen from the player. Can do. Accordingly, the rotation position of the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotation position without being recognized by the player, as a result. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can appear.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position to the descending position of each container 300 only when rotating the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b with a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not disposed at the lowered position, While the rotation of the rotators 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotators 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotary bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at positions that are not visible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the advance rotation at the lowered position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed when a predetermined operation means is operated. Thereby, it can suppress that the player recognizes the advance rotation of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the rotator is moved to the lowered position and cannot be seen by the player, There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, the payout apparatus 133, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, or the ball | bowl launching unit 112a (all refer FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated, for example. In a state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the ball payout, the sound output, or the ball launch. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. You may make it perform prior rotation. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is disposed on the base body 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210 and on the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 that are rotatably supported between the opposing surfaces of the cover body 420 and the base body 410, and arranged in a posture facing the distal end side, and these It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are coupled so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

  The base body 410 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and cover bodies 420 are partially disposed (covered) at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are respectively recessed at the positions where they are coaxial. Established.

  In addition, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 453 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is projected from the front surface of the base body 410. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. .

  A cutout 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 so that a space for allowing the arm body 430 to rotate is secured. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 at a predetermined angle or more can be regulated by bringing the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430. Formed. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to exhibit a function as a stopper that restricts the rotation of the arm member 420 by a predetermined angle or more.

  A rotating body 413 is disposed in the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotating body 413 is a member formed so as to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor (not shown). When the first member 440 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 31A), the first member 440 When the first member 440 is placed in the lowered position while being shielded and not visible to the player (FIG. 31 (c)), the game is placed vertically above the first member 440. It is possible to see from the person.

  The arm body 430 is a long rod-like body that is formed by bending in a generally letter shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotation shaft 431 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and protrudes coaxially from the front surface and the back surface of the base body side of the arm body 430. Is done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the tip end side is moved up and down around the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center.

  The driven groove 432 is a part through which an eccentric pin 454 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted. Shape). As will be described later, as the crank gear 453 rotates, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432, so that the arm body 430 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431.

  The connection pin 433 is a rod-like body protruding from the front surface on the distal end side of the arm body 430 and is slidably inserted along a slide groove 441 a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. Via the connecting pin 433, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected so as to be relatively movable.

  Note that a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430, as will be described later. Is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming out of the sliding groove 441a. In addition, the arm body 430 is provided with a rotating body 434 in front of a position opposite to the driven groove 432 across the bent portion. The rotating body 434 is formed to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor 435 disposed on the back side of the arm body 430.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 positioned eccentric from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

  The mounting plate 451 is disposed in front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 protrudes from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by a retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove. Regulate exiting.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment) An eccentric pin 454 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced in the vertical direction in a front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed up or pushed down by the eccentric pin 454 that slides in the driven groove 432, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is connected to the arm body 430 so as to be relatively displaceable via the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independent of each other. By being rotated, as described later, it is allowed to move freely in a combination of linear motion and rotational motion (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, with reference to FIG.26 and FIG.27, the detailed structure of the 1st member 440 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatable on the base 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back surfaces of the base 441, and the back of the base 441, respectively. The disposed arm member 444, a drive motor 445 that generates a drive force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444 are mainly used. Prepare.

  The base body 441 is a member that forms a skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed in a circular plate shape in front view. A pair of sliding grooves 441 a are formed in the base body 441. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as an opening in the shape of a long hole in a front view extending in a straight line, and a pair is arranged non-parallel. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441 a are arranged in a reverse C shape in front view that is inclined upward from the center toward both ends in the front view of the base body 441.

  A cylindrical tube portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected on the back surface of the base body 441, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is provided to protrude. Is done.

  A connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connection pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 441b, the support area of the connection pin 433 can be expanded correspondingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. .

  The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed in a disk shape that has a circular shape in front view and has a predetermined thickness dimension that is substantially the same diameter as the base body 441. The front body 442 is formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in the present embodiment) are disposed inside the front body 442. Therefore, the light which permeate | transmitted the front and outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated toward the exterior from a front and an outer peripheral surface by light-emitting (lighting or blinking) a some light emission means. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize so that the whole (front surface and outer peripheral surface) of the front body 442 may emit light.

  The front body 442 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on the base body 441 after the connection pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base body 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base body 441 from the back side, and at least the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base body 441 is at least of the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is mounted (fastened and fixed), and this collar is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off the base 441.

  The arm member 444 is a long member that is longer than the diameter of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444 a is a hole that is supported by the shaft 441 a of the front body 441 and is formed at a position that is the center in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444 below the pivot support hole 444a ( It is formed as an opening having a long hole shape when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 444 is pivotally supported on a shaft 441a between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back surface body 443 in a posture in which both end portions project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23). As described above, the eccentric pin 446b is slid along the driven groove 444b in accordance with the rotation of the crank member 446, and thus is rotated about the shaft support hole 444b.

  The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotary body 446 a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445, and a rotation center (drive motor 445) of the rotary body 446 a. And an eccentric pin 446b positioned eccentric from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446 b protrudes from the front surface of the rotating body 446 a and is inserted into the driven groove 444 b of the arm member 444.

  When the rotary body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotary body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus with a predetermined radius. Thus, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the shaft support hole 444a is alternately rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment). The arm member 444 is rotated about the (axis 441c) as a rotation center (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the player can visually recognize the operation of the arm member 444 in such a manner that both end portions of the arm member 444 projecting from the both sides of the front body 442 are reciprocated up and down alternately. . Further, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, the reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 as will be described later. Thus, the player can visually recognize the movement of the front body 442 relative to each other.

  Next, the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pair of left and right rotating units 500 are disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 6), and the pair of left and right rotating units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for, it is formed with substantially the same configuration, so only one (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the left-right rotation unit 500. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged on the front surface of the front base 512, the front base 512 overlaid on the front side of the rear base 511 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front base 513. A cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 disposed on the back side of the back surface base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back surface base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520, And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

  On the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, shaft support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at the same positions. Established. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotation shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted, and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 described later of the transmission mechanism is inserted.

  The displacement member 530 is a member having a blade-like decoration on the front, and mainly includes a rotation shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft base holes 511a and 513a of the back surface base 511 and the cover body 513, and the front surface and the back surface on the base end side (the lower side in FIG. 29) of the displacement member 530. Are projected from the same axis. The displacement member 530 can rotate between the retracted position overlapping the front base 512 in the front view and the projecting position projecting toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210 with the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is rotatably supported, and is recessed at a position away from the rotating shaft 531 by a predetermined distance from the distal end side. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, whereby the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is engaged with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. A crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530 are mainly provided.

  The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is provided to project from the rotation center toward the front. The link member 550 is a rod-like body disposed between the opposed surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530, and a connecting hole 551 is recessed in the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. The connecting pin 552 protrudes from the front of the.

  The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported by the connection hole 551 of the link member 550 through the opening 512 b of the front base 512, and the connection pin 552 of the link member 550 is driven by the driven hole of the displacement member 530. 532 is rotatably supported. Thereby, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550, and a crank mechanism is comprised.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. Accordingly, the displacement member 530 is rotated between the above-described retracted position and the overhang position with the rotation shaft 431 as the rotation center (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the one positioned on the left side (left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front with respect to the pair of arm bodies 430, respectively. These are referred to as “left” arm body 430 and “right” arm body 430.

  FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 31 (a) is in a state of being placed in the raised position, and FIG. 31 (b) is a view of the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 31C corresponds to the state of being arranged in the lowered position.

  32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 32 (a) in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) in FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 32C corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG.

  32A to 32C correspond to cross-sectional views in which the back surface of the first member 440 is visually recognized by cutting along a plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. FIG. Further, the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, while the back body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are not illustrated. The same applies to FIG. 35, FIG. 36, FIG. 38, and FIG. 40, which will be described later, and will not be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing the tip end side (the connecting pin 433 side) upward. The first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are positioned in proximity to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as “outer terminal ends”) of the sliding grooves 441 a on the side close to the radially outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are driven to rotate from the state shown in FIGS. 31A and 32A and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is driven to the driven groove 432. The left and right arm bodies 430 are respectively pushed downward while sliding.

  As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Displaced. From this state, when each crank gear 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). Thus, the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (the connecting pin 433 side) downward. The first member 440 is positioned at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the rotating body 413 is exposed above the first member 440 so as to be visible to the player.

  The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are positioned in proximity to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as “inner terminal ends”) of the sliding grooves 441 a on the side close to the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In the present embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end in the lowered position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the raised position.

  Thus, as described later, when the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member 430 using the action of inertia and the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowered position is set. The relative displacement amount at can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are driven to rotate in the direction opposite to that described above from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), the rotation of each crank gear 453, As the eccentric pin 454 slides on the driven groove 432 and pushes the left and right arm bodies 430 upward, finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit 400 is placed in the raised position.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400, the 1st member 440 can be raised / lowered between a raise position and a downward position. However, the above-described operation described as an example of raising and lowering the first member 440 is such that the first member 440 moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. There is little change in movement.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the distal end sides (connection pins 433) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are the first ones. Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the mode of rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430. it can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) is in a state where it is disposed at the raised position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged at the lowered position. Each corresponds to a state.

  35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) 33 (a) to 33 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, respectively, and FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are the center in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Each corresponds to a sectional rear view of the idle unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven from the state in which the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, and the tip side The right arm body 430 is rotated in the direction of rotation in which the (connecting pin 433) moves downward (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as “downward rotation”).

  By the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, so that FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder.

  Here, the left arm body 430 in the stopped state (on the right side in FIG. 35A) is, as shown in FIG. 237A, between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a in the raised position. A predetermined gap is formed in the. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (inclined) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder (lowering the left shoulder in FIG. 35B), the sliding groove 441a to which the connection pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected. Is inclined more steeply, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged to allow the movement (falling) of the first member 440 by the action of gravity. .

  Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 is moved to a predetermined rotational position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotational position, the first member 440 is brought into the state shown in FIGS. 33B and 35B by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be arranged.

  That is, until the right arm body 430 reaches the predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 that has been driven by the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is moved to the right arm body 430 after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of following the downward rotation of the arm body 430, the arm body 430 can be rapidly displaced downward by a free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (b)) arm 430 slides. By further pushing down the moving groove 441a, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), it is possible to further change (tilt) the posture of the first member 40 to lower the right shoulder to a steep angle. .

  In this case, the arm body 430 on the left (right side in FIG. 35B) is in a stopped state, and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. The first member 440 can be rotated with the right side in (b) as the center of rotation. As the right arm body 430 is rotated downward, the first member 440 is viewed from the left arm body 430 side (when viewed from the front). The state pushed into the left side of FIG. 33 can be formed.

  That is, in the process from the raised position in FIG. 33A to the state shown in FIG. 33C, the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational motion in the direction of descending to the right (FIG. 33 clockwise), and a linear motion to the left (left direction in FIG. 33) can be displaced by Can change the movement.

  When the state shown in FIG. 33C and FIG. 35C is reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left arm body 430 (left side in FIG. 33 (c)) is then rotated downward.

  Due to the downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, so that FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from the right-down shoulder posture to the horizontal posture.

  In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is further moved downward from the state shown in FIGS. 34A and 36A to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 (the right side in FIG. 36A) pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, which is contrary to the case described above (see FIG. 33). As shown in b) and FIG. 36 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the left shoulder.

  When reaching the state shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted. From this state, Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34B) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the posture of lowering the left shoulder to the horizontal posture, and is disposed at the lowest position. Can do. That is, it is arranged at the lowered position.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the front end sides (connections) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently of each other, so that the first member 440 moves linearly. It is possible to give a movement that combines a rotational movement and a change in the movement.

  In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 have their base end sides (rotating shafts 431) rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and are rotated around the base end sides. Each of the front end sides (connection pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are slid and displaced linearly, it is possible to give the first member 440 a motion that combines a linear motion and a rotational motion in a more complicated manner. Can be given to that movement.

  Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged at the raised position or the lowered position is inertial with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. Relative displacement can be achieved by the action of inertia. The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement at the lowered position as an example.

  37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 37 (a) shows a state where the first member 440 is located at the center. In FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c), the state in which the first member 440 rolls from side to side from the state illustrated in FIG. 37 (a) is illustrated.

  38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) are the same as FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Each corresponds to a rear sectional view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged at the lowered position (reference position), the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected to the sliding grooves of the first member 440. It arrange | positions in the position which has a clearance gap between each of the outer terminal of 441a, and an inner terminal. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the gap described above.

  For example, when one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) at a predetermined speed and then stopped, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 A displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action). Can change the movement.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed in a straight line and are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, When the one member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (inertial action), a rotational component can be imparted to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolled) not only in a linear motion but also in a combination of a linear motion and a rotational motion. As a result, the first member 440 is changed into a motion. Can be given.

  Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a straight line, when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a due to the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430, resistance is reduced. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. Thereby, the displacement of the first member 440 accompanying the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially C shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 in the left and right is converged and stopped, the first state is maintained in the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, in the state where an effect by another unit or a display device is performed and the central idle unit 400 is retracted to the raised position and stands by, the first member 440 can be suppressed from rattling with respect to the arm body 430. . As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, when the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right by inertia (inertial action) after the arm body 430 is stopped, the first member maintains the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. However, a structure that only moves linearly (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be displaced independently) is impossible, and the left and right arm bodies 430 are independently displaced as in this embodiment. This is possible for the first time by making it possible. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member 440.

  That is, in the structure in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position (conventional product), even if the arm body is stopped, it acts on the first member as the arm stops. The inertial force to be generated cannot be a trigger for reciprocating (swaying) the first member from side to side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture, only one arm body 430 is displaced (rotated) while the other arm body 430 is stopped. Since the one member 440 can be arranged at the reference position (for example, the lowered position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force accompanying the stop of the other arm body 430 is reciprocated left and right (rolling). ). As a result, the first member 440 can be reliably reciprocated left and right, and the amplitude of the left and right reciprocation can be increased.

  Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) left and right with inertia (inertial action) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430. Other locations are possible as possible. That is, in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440, It may be the position of. Therefore, it is not limited to the ascending position or the descending position, and a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Next, an operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 left and right using the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 is moved to the left and right arm bodies 430 even after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 left and right due to the inertia (inertia action) described above converges. Can be reciprocated left and right without rotating.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 disposed at the lowered position. FIG. 39 (a) shows a state in which the first member 440 is located at the center. FIG. 39B and FIG. 39C show a state where the first member 440 is swayed from side to side from the state shown in FIG.

  40 (a) to 40 (c) are sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are shown in FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Each corresponds to a rear sectional view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being disposed at the lowered position (reference position), the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are, as described above, the first member 440. Each of the sliding grooves 441a is disposed at a position having a gap between the outer end and the inner end. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the gap described above.

  That is, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base 441, the first member 440 displaces (rotates) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the driving motor 445, and the reaction force is applied to the base 441. The connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a by the reaction force. As a result, even if the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolled).

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members As shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise from the front (clockwise) as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b) so that the reaction force acts. Thus, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, and the arm member 444 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c). Rotate around (clockwise).

  Thereby, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolling), and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the base body 441 and rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445, the first member 440 is not displaced by the arm member 444. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotation direction. As a result, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the shaft 441c of the base 441) is positioned at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430. It is possible to easily connect the force to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (the base body 441 and the front body 442).

  Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (rolls) by the reaction force during rotation of the arm member 444. However, as can be understood from the above configuration, It is also possible in position. That is, in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440, It may be the position of. Therefore, it is not limited to the ascending position or the descending position, and a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Here, a sensor device that detects the posture of the first member 440 may be provided, and control for changing the rotation state of the arm member 444 may be performed based on the detection result of the sensor device. Thereby, the movement of the 1st member 440 can be converged rapidly, or the 1st member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (roll).

  For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (sideways) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). When it is performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocation of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). Is applied in a direction to cancel the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

  Alternatively, from the state in which the movement of the first member 440 has converged and stopped, or the state in which the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolled) by inertia (inertial action), the first member 440 The base member 441 and the front body 442 are reciprocated or the arm member 444 is rotated so as to strengthen the reciprocation (the direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is amplified in the motion of the base 441 and the front body 442). Act on). Accordingly, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right, and a change can be imparted to the left and right reciprocation of the first member 440 according to the rotation state of the arm member 444.

  As the sensor, an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor (for example, a base member 441, a front body 442, a back body 443, etc.) that detects acceleration in three directions is provided in other parts of the first member 440 excluding the arm member 444. , Capacitance type, piezo type, etc.), distance sensors that detect the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440 (for example, a triangulation type, a time-of-flight type, etc.). The distance sensor is provided in at least two locations and configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

  Next, the cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41 (a) is a front view of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 taken along the line XLIc-XLIc in FIG.

  41 (a) to 41 (c) illustrate a state in which the central idle unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position and the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position. 41 (a) to 41 (c), the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding. Only the main components necessary for the description are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to abut against a pair of cylindrical portions 441b erected on the back surface of the base body 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be restricted.

  For example, when the central floating unit 400 placed at the raised position is placed at the lowered position by the downward rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430, the left and right turned unit 500 is placed at the extended position at the same time. By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right due to inertia (inertia action) as described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38). (Rolling) can be controlled.

  Alternatively, when the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is displaced (rotated), the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), so that the first reaction is caused by the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444. It is possible to restrict the members (base 441 and front body 442) from reciprocating left and right (rolling), whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be made visible to the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm is changed according to the disposition position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. A mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

  Next, the left / right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, with reference to FIG.42 and FIG.43, the relationship between the left-right sensor apparatus 600 and the center floating unit 400 is demonstrated.

  42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are the XLIIb-XLIIb line of FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of a). 42 shows a state in which the first member 440 is disposed in the raised position, and in FIG. 43, the first member 440 is disposed in the lowered position.

  42 and 43, only the rear case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, and other components are not shown. Is done. 42 and 43, the path of light irradiated from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated on the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by using two-dot chain lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45 to be described later, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left / right sensor device 600 detects a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16, and acquires the presence / absence (presence), position, operation direction, and operation speed thereof. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Established.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated on the plate glass 16a are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42A). (Left and right direction) The light emitting portion is disposed in an inclined posture inward so as to have an overlap at the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are placed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening portion (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening portion of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be arranged, and can be difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  In this case, it is the front of the glass plate 16a (FIG. 42 (a) front side of the paper, the lower side of FIG. 42 (b)), and obliquely forward of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting part). ), The light emitted from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the glass plate 16a is reflected by the player's fingers, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving unit. The presence of the person's finger is detected.

  The left and right sensor device 600 has the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides, and can perform detection at two positions in front of the glass sheet 16a (areas corresponding to the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of both the sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (which position is in front of the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2) and the operation direction (from the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). Direction or the opposite direction) or operation speed (speed when traversing between the irradiation areas S1 and S2) can be detected.

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor device 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) is set to overlap the movement region of the first member 440. Is done. In other words, the first member 440 is formed to be displaceable to a position that overlaps at least a part of the detection region of the left and right sensor device (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the glass sheet 16a).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the first member 440 is in front of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 43 (a) on the front side of FIG. 43, lower side of FIG. 43 (b)). , An area (hereinafter referred to as “detection area of the first sensor 610”) obliquely in front of the irradiation area S1 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) and the front of the plate glass 16a. Thus, it is displaced to a position that divides an area (hereinafter referred to as a “detection area of the second sensor 620”) obliquely forward of the irradiation area S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

  Thereby, in front of the plate glass 16a, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated. Therefore, it is reliably avoided that the second sensor 620 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the first sensor 610 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the second sensor 620, respectively. it can.

  Thus, for example, an effect that causes the player to select an alternative (for example, two positions on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions (corresponding to the detection area), and the player brings a finger close to one of the two areas (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Thus, when performing an effect of selecting one of them, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be increased.

  Further, as described above, the central floating unit 400 is formed such that the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 can be relatively displaced with respect to the first member 440 (base 441). Therefore, not only can the first member 440 be moved up and down linearly along the vertical direction, but the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right (see FIG. 39). Moreover, the stop position of the 1st member 440 can be biased to either one of the left-right direction (refer FIG.33 and FIG.34).

  Thereby, according to the movement (position) of the 1st member 440, the magnitude | size of at least one or both of the detection area of the 1st sensor 610 or the detection area of the 2nd sensor 620 can be changed. Thus, for example, the player moves his / her finger according to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and searches for the position (detection region) where the finger is detected. It can be performed.

  In addition, for example, the first member 440 may block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 or the detection area of the second sensor 620 so that the detection is impossible. In spite of the display instructing the player to select the selection target with fingers, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas and interferes with the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas, so that an instruction for prompting the player to select the other can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  44 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a).

  As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are disposed therein, and the plurality of light emitting means emit light (light on or turn off). By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface to the outside. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize so that the whole (front surface and outer peripheral surface) of the front body 442 may emit light.

  In this case, when light emitted from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident. Interference between the reflected light and the light emitted from the light emitting part occurs, and the light receiving part directly receives the incident light, thereby causing erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light irradiated to the outside from the front body 442 (particularly the outer peripheral surface) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position that can be shielded (a position that crosses a virtual line connecting the front body 442 and the sensors 610 and 620 (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B), hereinafter referred to as “shielding position”). Formed. Therefore, when the light emitting unit of the front body 442 emits light, the sensors 610 and 620 can be shielded from the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the displacement member 530 by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensors 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this manner, the displacement member 530 is also used as a means for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, so that the permanent shielding member can be used. Since it is not necessary to provide them, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, and accordingly, a space can be secured as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for displacement of other displacement members.

  Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and depending on the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed at the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevated position) of the first member 440.

  That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to correspond to the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for the arrangement of the shielding member. Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevating position) of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 can be reduced in size. Therefore, not only can the permanent shielding member be made unnecessary, but it is possible not only to achieve a reduction in component costs and a sufficient space, but also to reduce the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530.

  Next, the relationship between the left / right sensor device 600 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  45 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the left and right rotation unit 500 is formed such that the left and right displacement members 530 can be displaced (rotated) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). A sensor (not shown) for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are disposed at the retracted position and the extended position is provided. The left and right displaced members 530 are disposed between the retracted position and the extended position. Are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620, respectively.

  The left / right sensor device 600 is formed such that each sensor 610, 620 can independently detect that each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is disposed at an intermediate position (predetermined position). Accordingly, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the glass plate 16a and means for detecting the disposition of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position. It can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  It should be noted that the position where each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is detected by each sensor 610, 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be an overhang position instead of the intermediate position. Since it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the extended position, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method for detecting the dirt D of the glass sheet 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). In FIG. 46, the path of light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. 42A, the object F existing in the detection region of the first sensor 610 is contaminated with the dirt D attached to the irradiation region S1 (see FIG. 42A), respectively. It is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, when the object F (player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light is emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610. The light passes through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, then is reflected by the object F, and is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the forward path. Accordingly, the presence of the player's finger is detected by the first sensor 610.

  In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, It is possible to dispose each of the sensors 610, 620 from the player, with the opening interposed therebetween (see FIG. 6) deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position on the outer side in the width direction). It can be made difficult.

  However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46B, the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a become nearly parallel to each other). Therefore, if dirt D (for example, a greasy hand of a player's hand) adheres to the glass plate 16a, the dirt D causes light to be reflected in a direction different from the forward path, and the reflected light is reflected to the first sensor 610. The light receiving unit cannot receive light. Therefore, the first sensor 610 cannot detect the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are disposed in an inclined posture with the light emitting part and the light receiving part facing inward, so that the irradiation region S1 of the plate glass 16a is contaminated. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, and thereby the stain D on the irradiation region S1 on the plate glass 16a. The presence or absence of adhesion can be detected. In addition, the presence or absence of dirt D in the irradiation region S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 detects the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620.

  That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S1, and is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620. If not, it can be respectively determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610, dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S2, and the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 If no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation region S2.

  Here, the detection of the presence or absence of dirt D on the glass sheet 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is preferably performed in the process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since no player has entered the store, the object F (the player's finger) does not exist in front of the glass plate 16a (the detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, a distinction between the object F and the dirt D (for example, based on the difference between the path length when reflected by the object and the path length when reflected by the dirt D, a threshold is set for the time required from light emission to light reception. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of the dirt D on the plate glass 16a can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47A is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47A. Note that FIG. 47A corresponds to FIG. 47A and 47B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  In 1st Embodiment, when the drive motor 350 was rotationally driven, the case where the rotation was always transmitted by the transmission mechanism to the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b was demonstrated, However, Transmission in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The mechanism is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be intermittently transmitted to the second rotating body 340b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (d), the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is in mesh with the drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

  The first gear 2353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and other configurations are the same. Note that the number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 differs from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and the two gears (first side intermediate gear 2354a and second side intermediate gear 2354b) are axially moved (FIG. 47). (B) It is formed as an integrated member concentrically and integrated in the left-right direction).

  The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 2354 (the first intermediate gear 2354a and the second intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The The first side intermediate gear 2354a has 21 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as that of the first side intermediate gear 2354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is omitted. Specifically, the second-side intermediate gear 2354b includes a non-engagement region in which seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a remaining region of the non-engagement region (that is, 14 teeth around the second tooth). A meshing region that is a continuous region in the direction).

  In the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth are omitted (removed) and cannot be meshed with the teeth of the second gear 2355, so that the transmission of rotation from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is transmitted. Blocked. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, it is possible to mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, and rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

  In this case, the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth with respect to the first side intermediate gear 2354a in which the number of teeth is set to 21. Since the center angle is 120 degrees and the meshing area is an area corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, the center angle is 240 degrees.

  Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in a section corresponding to a non-engagement region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-engaged, and the second side intermediate gear 2354b and In the section corresponding to the start area where the second gear 2355 is engaged, the second gear 2355 is rotated. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. 49 (e) to 49 (e) are the same as FIG. In the state shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 9, respectively.

  48 to 50, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are used for the second rotation by using the symbols “A to C”. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a)), respectively. ) Is hereinafter referred to as “initial state”. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set to a boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (end of the meshing region, start of the non-meshing region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

  No. of FIG. 1 and FIG. 49A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 48). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, and the second display panel 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 2354 (the first gear). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the non-engagement region in the two-side intermediate gear 2354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49B, the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is disposed at the boundary position on the other side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the start end of the meshing region, the end of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  No. of FIG. 2 and FIG. 49B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the first half of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49C, the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  No. of FIG. 3 and FIG. 49 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the second half of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the second rotating body 340 b places the third display plate 343 </ b> C at the viewing position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. 4 and 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at one boundary position between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  Subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49A in FIG. 48 to the state shown in No. 3 and FIG. By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 4-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, it may be considered that the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49A to 49C is changed by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No in FIG. 48) is considered. .5 “C ′, B”) and the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 48).

  In addition, in FIG. 7-No. 9 may be replaced with a state where the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) is varied by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .7 “B ′, A”), the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48), and the ninth combination (No. 9 “C ′, C” in FIG. 48). be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears, No. 1 gear (intermediate gear 2354) meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) and transmits rotation, and the mating gear disengages from the mating gear and blocks rotation transmission. A non-engaged region is formed.

  Thereby, since the 2nd rotary body 340b can be temporarily stopped, rotating the 1st rotary body 340a, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective effect by rotating each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, and the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be released and restarted. The interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of figures of the second rotating body 340b can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears from the state where the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 48) is formed. 48, the table shown in FIG. 48 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 48) to display the eighth combination, and the table in FIG. 48 is advanced in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 48). Thus, the ninth combination can also appear.

  As a result, as in the former case, No. 4 in FIG. 7 to No. 8, with the second rotator 340 b stopped, only the first rotator 340 a is rotated to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48). (Ie, “B ′” is already appearing on one side and “A” is switched from “A” to “B” and “B ′, B” appears on the other side) and the latter As in the case of FIG. 9 to No. 8, both the first rotator 340 a and the second rotator 340 b are rotated so that the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears (that is, one of them). And the other graphic can be selected and executed in accordance with the game state.

  In the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed twice. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a non-engagement region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second intermediate gear 2354b), and the rotation and stop of the second rotator 340b are performed while the first rotator 340a is rotating. Are switched and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are respectively provided with the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C, and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees. The formation range (center angle) of the region is set to 120 degrees.

  Thereby, since the phase of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is not shifted, the table shown in FIG. 48 includes a combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b as an element. The length can be shortened (the number of table stages is reduced). Therefore, the rotation speed of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b required in order to make a desired figure combination appear can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required for making a desired figure combination appear.

  However, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set in a non-corresponding manner to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-engagement region is set to a range of the central angle of 108 degrees, as in the case of the first embodiment, a phase shift between the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of combinations (for example, 9 sets) of graphics, and it is also possible to form a state where the graphics are not combined, and to allow the player to visually recognize the displacement of the graphics (the combination is not established).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51A is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). 51A and 51B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where one non-engagement region and one engagement region are formed in the intermediate gear 2354 has been described. However, the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment includes a non-engagement region and a tooth. Two joint regions are formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51D, the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is engaged with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

  The first gear 3353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and the two gears (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) are axially moved (FIG. 51). (B) It is formed as an integrated member concentrically and integrated in the left-right direction).

  The first side intermediate gear 3354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 3353 over the entire circumference. Accordingly, while the first gear 3353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The The first side intermediate gear 3354a has 35 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as that of the first side intermediate gear 3354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is omitted. Specifically, the second intermediate gear 3354b includes a first non-engagement region X1 and a second non-engagement region X2, which are regions where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth. From the first meshing region Y1 that is located in one between the joint region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 and in which seven teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction, and the first toothing region Y1 The second meshing region Y2 is a region in which 14 phases are located in the circumferential direction and are located on the other side between the first meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees. And are formed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated by 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-engagement region X1 and the second non-engagement region X2, the first rotator 340a (first gear 3353) while the second rotator 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped. ) Can be rotated 120 degrees each.

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a table showing graphic combinations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 54A and 54B are the same as those shown in FIG. These correspond to the states shown as 5 and 6, respectively.

  52 to 54, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by the reference numerals "A to C", and the second rotation is performed. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, as in the case of the second embodiment, the initial state in the third embodiment is that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotator 340b are in the viewing position. Arranged. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first Of the non-engagement region X1) (see FIG. 51A).

  52 of FIG. 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. in FIG. 52). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 3354 (the first gear). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the first non-engagement region X1 in the two-side intermediate gear 3354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-engagement region X1 and the second engagement region Y2 (the start end of the second engagement region Y2 and the end of the first non-engagement region X1). Be placed.

  52 of FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (the first seven teeth of the 14 teeth).

  As a result, no. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52 of FIG. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (seven teeth in the latter half of the 14 teeth).

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the second rotating body 340 b places the third display plate 343 </ b> C at the viewing position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the start of the second non-meshing region). Is done.

  52 of FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the second non-engagement region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 5 and FIG. 54A, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-engagement region X2 and the first engagement region Y1 (the end of the second non-engagement region X, the first engagement). It is arranged at the start end of the region Y1.

  52 of FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (seven teeth).

  As a result, no. 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b places the first display plate 343A at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 6 and the state shown in FIG. 54B, the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 has a boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1). It is set to the end, the first end of the first non-engagement region X1 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Therefore, in the following, the aspect described above (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in No. 6 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 54 (b)) is substantially performed. The same aspect is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed in one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In the present embodiment, the number of stages in one cycle table is 15.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) has a meshing region (first and second meshing regions Y1, Y2) that meshes with the other gear (second gear 3355) and transmits rotation, and the other gear (second gear 3355). A non-engagement region (first and second non-engagement regions Y1, Y2) that forms non-engagement with the gear and blocks transmission of rotation is formed.

  Thereby, since the 2nd rotary body 340b can be temporarily stopped, rotating the 1st rotary body 340a, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective effect by rotating each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-engagement regions (first and second non-engagement regions X1, X2) that block transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. The toothed regions and the non-toothed regions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 4 to No. As shown by 7, the rotation of the second rotating body 340 b can be continuously stopped by two types of figures. Therefore, the expectation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be enhanced.

  In addition, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to No. By switching forward and reverse between 7 and 7, the rotational speeds of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be visually recognized by making the player different.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55A. FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). In FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only main components necessary for the description are illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described. However, the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are described. 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has sliding grooves 4439 formed in the respective distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and those A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted through the respective sliding grooves 4439 is provided so as to protrude from the back surface of the first member 4440.

  The sliding groove 4439 is formed as an opening having a long hole shape in a front view that extends linearly, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that can slide along the sliding groove 441a. Via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449, the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected so as to be relatively movable. Note that a collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a stopper.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400 in this embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are formed by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. Since the connecting pin 4449 protrudes from the first member 4440 and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm bodies 4430, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm body 4430, The direction (tilt angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

  That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). ), When the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolled) by the action of the reaction force generated (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially C shape, as described above, a rotation component can be applied, so the first member 440 is In addition to linear motion, the motion can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by a motion that combines rotational motion with linear motion.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (the opposing angle of the letter C) is adjusted. As a result, the aspect of the reciprocating motion of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

  For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (decreasing the opposing angle of the letter C), the rotational component is increased, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the opposing angle of the letter C), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of linear motion can be increased.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, so that no rotation component is generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. Can be reciprocated (rolled) only by linear motion. That is, a mode in which the first member 4440 moves horizontally in the left-right direction can be formed.

  As described above, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the aspect of the first member 4440 reciprocating left and right (including the rotational component and the rotational component). The first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base 441) cannot be achieved. This is possible for the first time by forming the sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member 4440.

  Next, the central idle unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are the central floating unit 400. 4 is a cross-sectional rear view of the left / right rotation unit 5500.

  Note that FIG. 56B and FIG. 57B correspond to FIG. 56 and 57, the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, and the main parts necessary for the description are omitted. Only the configuration is shown.

  The left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged at a lower position in the overhang position than the left / right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left and right rotation unit 5500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 (by the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 5500). The pair of cylindrical portions 441b standing on the back surface of the base body 441) can be pushed down.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position (one side is stretched). The first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (sideways) by repeating the operation of slightly retracting the other from the protruding position while being arranged at the extended position.

  In this case, the operation of disposing the left and right displacement members 530 alternately at the extended position, the operation of retreating from the extended position, and the operation of the first member 440 reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so as to be linked (synchronized) with each other. The first member 440 and the whole of the left and right displacement members 530 can be linked together to form a movement that swings up, down, left, and right, allowing the player to recognize a large movement with a sense of unity.

  Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 collides with the first member 440 (cylinder part 441b), and the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision, and predetermined. After the elapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the first member 440 may continue to reciprocate left and right (roll). The player can recognize the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 in the left and right directions.

  Thus, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved with respect to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the upward rotation or downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped. In addition to the form of reciprocating left and right, the form of reciprocating the first member 440 left and right using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without using the inertial force resulting from the displacement of the arm body 430 Can also be formed.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the three-surface graphics. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of display surfaces n of the first rotator 340a and the number of surfaces m of the second rotator 340b are determined. Different values may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b includes the driving gear 351, the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gear 355 are not limited thereto. , 2355, 3355 may be provided.

  For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, and 3355 are meshed with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354, and the second rotating body 340b. And a structure in which the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 is exemplified. According to such a structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the base body 331 is provided with the reflection portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion that forms the back surface of the container 330 (FIG. 18B). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the reflection part RF may be disposed in another part. As another part, it is a part of base 331, and the inner surface of the part which forms the upper surface or lower surface of container 330 is illustrated. Since each of these surfaces is a surface on which the outer peripheral surfaces (display panels 343A to 343C) face each other when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is sent to the player. It can be reflected so as to be visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflection is accompanied by the rotation. The gap between the inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the interval in the vertical direction in FIG. 18 (b)) can be increased and decreased. The opposing angle of each rotating body 340a, 340b with each display plate 343A to 343C with respect to each inner surface of the substrate 441 disposed can be changed. Thereby, the aspect of the reflected light can be changed with respect to the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN as the reflected light from the reflection part RF.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the rotation axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. It may be what you do. Thereby, for example, the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b can be displaced (moved) in directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, each of the display plates 344A to 344C is preferably formed on a square in front view. This is because when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are arranged side by side, it is possible to form a sense of unity of the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) disposed in one container 330 is two in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be three or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the base end side of the left and right arm bodies 430 is rotatably supported by the base body 410 in the central floating unit 400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed to be slidable with respect to the base body 410. Also by the slide displacement, the left and right arm bodies 430 can be independently displaced, so that the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of the above embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) or have inertial force. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 can be moved relative to each other. Another structure may be sufficient as the structure connected so that displacement is possible.

  As another structure, for example, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, rubber-like elastic body, urethane, metal coil spring / torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). In addition, a structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected to each other by a shaft and a shaft hole, and the relative displacement is performed by rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. A structure that allows the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 to be connected to each other by a spherical ball and a stud that is in spherical contact with the ball, and a structure that enables relative displacement by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. A structure in which the tip of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms, and relative displacement is possible by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a part or all of these are assembled. Align were structures, and the like are exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation method when the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position has been described. However, each of these operation methods is an example, and other operation methods can naturally be adopted. . Therefore, for example, a part of the operation method shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be replaced with another operation method.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the case where the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action) in the central floating unit 400, the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the first member 440 reciprocates left and right. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the reciprocation of the first member 440 is formed to the left and right without causing the player to recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocation due to inertia is performed. The player can be made aware that it is continuing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the arm member 444 has a bilaterally symmetric shape and the center of gravity position is located in the center in the left-right direction in the central floating unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The position of the center of gravity may be decentered to either one of the left and right directions. According to this, the reaction force applied to the base body 441 with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocation (rolling) of the first member 440 in the left and right directions can be increased and a change can be given.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500 and 5500, the displacement member 530 is brought into direct contact with the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441), thereby moving the first member 440. Although the case where the first member 440 is controlled or the first member 440 is caused to move is not limited to this, the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other. A similar operation may be performed.

  Specifically, a magnet is disposed on one of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and at the other end of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is disposed and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or iron member, so that the first member 440 moves. A structure that restricts the movement or causes the first member 440 to move is exemplified.

  According to this, since the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other and the two can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, damage due to collision can be suppressed. Note that when an iron member is disposed on the other of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. By balancing the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440, the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530, so that Keep in contact.

<About control configuration>
Next, a first control example of the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Regarding the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A shows the frame button 22 and the touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a pressing part that is pressed by the player, and is configured such that a limit-type switch is turned on when the pressing part is pressed downward by a predetermined amount. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and even at the next monitoring timing (after 2 ms) determined as “ON” from the “OFF” state. If it is determined “ON”, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is determined that the frame button 22 is erroneously pressed when the ON state is instantaneously caused by noise or the like. Further, when the frame button 22 is not continuously pressed, that is, the state is switched from the “ON” state to the “OFF” state, and it is determined that the frame button 22 is “OFF” at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is pressed. It is determined that is released.

  The touch switch 290 is disposed close to the frame button 22 and the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor unit arranged on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The touch switch 290 is configured to turn on when infrared rays are radiated from the sensor unit and the infrared rays reflected by the object are identified. Yes. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing a hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. The operation of bringing a hand or the like closer to the sensor unit in order to turn on the touch switch 290 is referred to as operating the touch switch 290.

  Similarly to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 also monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at a predetermined interval (2 ms in this control example), and then changes from the state determined as “OFF” to the “ON” state. Then, when it is further determined “ON”, it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. A character “touch” is shown on the upper surface of the sensor portion of the touch switch 290 so that the player can easily understand that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

  FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22 and is configured by a push switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 includes an upper selection switch 291a configured with an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b configured with a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is used by being pressed by the player when mainly adjusting the volume. When the upper selection switch 291a is pressed, the volume is set to increase. In addition, the volume is set to be low by pressing the lower selection switch 291b. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

  On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol composed of characters and numbers, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol sequences are scrolled in the direction of the arrow X (from right to left) with periodicity and are displayed in a variable manner. In particular, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order, and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The left column part of this display area is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the upper symbol column Z1, the lower symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is done. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the middle line part of this display area is the effective line L2, the right line part is the effective line L3, and the diagonal line from the lower left to the upper right direction is the effective line L4. The diagonal lines from the upper left to the lower right constitute a total of five effective lines, including the effective line L5, and even if the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  Although omitted in FIG. 59, the display area of the third symbol display device is provided with a sub display area in addition to the display area (main display area) in which the above-described third symbol is displayed. The sub display area is horizontally long below the main display area, and is further equally divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area on the left is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not yet been executed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, and the other small areas. The area is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in a small area of the sub display area. In the small area, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one held ball number, and the number of held balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is four. Indicates a sphere. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  Further, in this control example, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed as a symbol with only a number attached to the symbol when super reach is reached, etc. There are cases where the display area is enlarged and the display area of the small display area disappears. By comprising in this way, a display mode with a fresh taste can be displayed to a player.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four areas is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, the color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left and right sensor device 600 when the left and right selection effect is executed. When the left / right selection effect is executed, first, the central floating unit 400 covers the common area where the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area (detection area) S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap. Descend.

  When the central floating unit 400 is lowered, the light emitted from the left and right sensor device 600 is shielded by the lowered central floating unit 400, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. Thereby, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the location where the central floating unit 400 is lowered is excluded from the detection region of the left and right sensor device, and the irradiation region (detection region) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 The irradiation area (detection area) is divided.

  The contents to be selected by the player are displayed in the display areas corresponding to the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 thus divided (in FIG. 60, the sunset background and the irradiation area are displayed in the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1). A starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). By configuring in this way, the player can view the display contents displayed in the display area and make an arbitrary selection simply by touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. Further, the region where the irradiation region S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation region S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the region near the overlapping region are excluded from the irradiation region of the left and right sensor device 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely divided, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the player's finger.

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 of this control example and the lowering control of the central idle unit 400, when an effect that only detects whether or not the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, Since the left and right sensor device 600 is provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect the player's fingers in a wide area. When the player performs an effect of selecting either left or right, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the player's finger. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early by constructing a detection situation suitable for each effect for a plurality of effects for detecting the player's fingers.

  In the present control example, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to realize the left / right selection effect by dividing the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1, S2 of the left / right sensor device 600, but left / right using other configurations. You may comprise so that selection production | presentation is realizable. Another example in which the left / right selection effect can be realized will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60B is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guidance unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect in another example is executed. In this example, when the left / right selection process is executed, first, the central floating unit 400 is lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, information is acquired from an acceleration sensor provided in the central idle unit 400, and position information of the central idle unit 400 is calculated.

  Based on the calculated position information, a predetermined display area that is not covered by the central floating unit 400 is set as the left / right selection display area among the display areas of the third symbol display device 81, Display the selection screen. Next, the left and right selection device 600 is varied so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 overlap the left and right selection screen.

  According to the configuration of another example described above, the left / right selection displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the movement of the variable member (central floating unit 400) covering the display region of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left / right sensor device 600 can be changed, there is an effect that the player's selection operation in the left / right selection effect can be reliably detected.

  In this example, the configuration in which the position of the variable member is calculated using an acceleration sensor is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the time effect period (mode C) will be described. When 55 minutes have passed since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an effect that can be interacted with the dog and the touch switch 290 as a contact time is displayed as a 5-minute time effect period (mode C). A display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode (see FIG. 59) displayed in the normal performance period (mode A) is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 61 and displayed. The main display area in which the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed at the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, in the lower left display area, an effect that prompts the player to operate the touch center 290 so as to display an effect of calling the dog nearby (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog) is displayed. The characters “call” are displayed, and the player is informed that an effect of calling this dog is displayed when the touch switch 290 is operated.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a “stroking effect” mode as a contact effect. In the “stroking effect”, a user approaches his / her hand to a distance at which the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and rotates the frame button 22 to turn on (operate) the touch switch 290. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, a pattern imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed so as to stroke the dog's head, and the dog is variably displayed with a happy expression.

  By doing so, the movement of the player's hand is as if stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he is stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed on the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking action, and on the right side of the display screen according to the result of the lottery The displayed indicator rises.

  The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the fish school reliability until the next time effect period (the effect period based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292) arrives. That is, the contact effect executed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating the touch switch 290 many times during the contact effect, the fish school reliability is maintained until the next time effect period. It can be set to increase the degree.

  By configuring in this way, the player can change the reliability of the production by his own operation, so he can actively participate in the game and can be prevented from getting bored with the game. It becomes.

  In this control example, the “stroking effect” has been described as the contact effect. However, a plurality of contact effect contents may be provided. In the case of providing a plurality of effects, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator is lowered if the indicator has a high rate of increase but is operated by mistake, so that the player can select game characteristics. As such an effect, for example, a “brushing effect” can be considered. In the “brushing effect”, an indicator can be greatly raised by brushing the displayed torso of the dog well, and the indicator can be lowered if the dog's face is mistakenly brushed.

  Moreover, you may provide the effect that an indicator falls, when a player performs a contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily perform setting such as intentionally lowering the fish school reliability and increasing the appearance frequency.

  Further, a plurality of types of dogs may be prepared, and depending on the type of dog, the state of raising the indicator and the types of effects that can be set may be changed. In the case of preparing a plurality of types of dogs, for example, the types of dogs appearing on the basis of a plurality of missions and game contents in a normal period may be changed. By configuring in this way, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact effect, the games in the normal period are concentrated and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game.

  In addition, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating around the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms when operated quickly. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set most easily. Therefore, a player who is operating the touch switch 290 quickly with a correct operation can give more benefits. In addition, this “stroking effect” is configured so that the level of the indicator does not rise for a player who keeps the touch switch 290 on for a long time, that is, a player who just holds his hand over the touch switch 290. did. Thereby, it can be urged to play a game with a correct operation.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an example of a “contact effect” end screen. It is informed that the reliability of the school of fish has reached 70% by the operation of the touch switch 290 in the “contact time” (see FIG. 62A) which is the “contact effect”. In addition, when the determination result is a big hit holding result among the determination results stored on hold at the end of the “contact time”, the game result of the “contact time” is ignored and the “fish school reliability is 100”. % "May be displayed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to keep the player interested until the end of the production, and it is possible to suppress boredom with the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the display mode of the volume setting during the variable display will be described. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variation display. In this control example, the volume can be set based on the player's operation as long as the reach is established even if the 3rd symbol display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is being executed. It is configured as follows.

  When the frame button 22 is operated while the variation display of the third symbol is being executed, the volume setting screen is displayed above the variation screen of the third symbol. By operating the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is adjusted. On the volume setting screen, the current volume level, the text “Volume is being set” indicating that the volume can be set, and a mark for prompting to operate the operation switch 291 are displayed.

  In this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 has not been operated for a predetermined time when the 3rd pattern being changed is in the reach state or after the volume setting is enabled (after the volume setting screen is displayed). Or when the operation for completing the volume setting is performed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the volume can be set during the variation display of the third symbol, so that the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (listening to the game volume). it can. As a result, it is possible to adjust the sound volume when the third symbol is not fluctuating, and to reduce the inconvenience that the game sound volume becomes unexpected when the fluctuating display of the third symbol is started.

  In this control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen, but in addition to this, the currently output game volume with respect to the maximum value of the game volume output by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. You may display the volume value which a player can grasp | ascertain relatively. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the volume based on the currently output game volume and the volume value, and further reduce the problem of unexpected game volume being output during the game. Is possible.

  Moreover, when using such a structure, it is good to display so that a player can grasp | ascertain the maximum value of the game volume in the variation display currently performed. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound is generated in the current variation display, and the volume can be adjusted in advance. Further, by displaying the maximum value of the game volume in the currently executed variable display, the player can predict the result of the determination of success / failure, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the result of the determination of success / failure is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With this configuration, it is possible to give a change based on the game result to a normally performed volume adjustment operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  63 shows the volume setting screen when the third symbol is changing, the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed when the state where the third symbol is not changing continues for a predetermined time. Even when a standby screen (demo screen) is displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the demonstration screen was displayed, or when a predetermined operation is performed during the demonstration screen, the volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81, etc. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Are used, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a composed of four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing special symbol reservation balls. There is an area. In each area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a special symbol having a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (special symbol). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66 (a)) for a special symbol with a high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66 (a)) for a special symbol with a low probability are as follows. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this control example, two types of jackpot types, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are set, and either the “big hit A” or “big hit B” is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is stored in the special symbol big-random number table for the low probability. Stored. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first jackpot type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” is “jackpot A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Note that the random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)), This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Next, a mechanism will be described in which the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern, and the sound lamp control device 113 determines a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. In the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, a variation pattern selection table for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol is set as shown in FIGS.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the time data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal time of 54 minutes is measured. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set after the preparation period. The Although details of each period will be described later, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected by the different period varies depending on the set period. Is set. Here, even if a different effect is set, the effect is composed of the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the change time of each effect, the determination result, whether or not there is a rough change. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, main controller 110 does not need to determine individual variation patterns, and can reduce control addition. Further, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can also be suppressed.

  A variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol for which variation starts and the current presentation mode. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is a rough type and variation time of the variation pattern. Various variations of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as variation patterns to be selected when the common determination result of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is big hit. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and the determination result is correct, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern that becomes “super reach” is set more easily than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the determination result is a win, the frequency of the “super reach” variation pattern is executed and the number of jackpots increases. It is easy to have expectations.

  It should be noted that the normal reach jackpot variation pattern, which is a jackpot variation pattern of “normal reach”, reaches the middle symbol row Z2 for a predetermined time through a reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol. This is a variable display mode in which the display is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode after being displayed. The variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot is composed of a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of the “super reach” jackpot described later.

  Super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, as in the case of normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and then the characters are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of “super reach” is configured with a variation time relatively longer than the variation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is out, as a variation pattern for removal, “displace for a short time (for short time)”, “disengage for a long time (for short time)” "," Reach out of normal reach ", and" out of super reach ". The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, is composed of a fluctuation time (7000 ms) shorter than the other fluctuation patterns, and is displayed in the main symbol for a predetermined time without being displayed in the reach display mode. Is displayed in a variable manner, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, is configured with a fluctuation time (10000 ms) longer than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach loss variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal reach loss”, is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern in that the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the reach display pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constituted lottery result is out of place. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the determination result is unacceptable. Moreover, the super reach loss variation pattern that is “super reach loss” is a display mode that is different from the various super reach jackpot variation patterns in that it is finally displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss.

  In addition, when the determination result of the special symbol is unacceptable, the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 Alternatively, the variation type counter CS1 may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratios are different.

  For example, in the case where the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the variation pattern of “displacement for a short time” and may be selected. As a result, when the number of reserves is 0 to 2, the variation time of the selected variation pattern becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy to make the game ball enter the first winning port 64, and the variation of the special symbol Can be prevented from occurring during the period in which the game is stopped (the period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, it is preferable to set a larger ratio of selecting the variation pattern of “short time out”. As a result, when the number of reserves is close to the upper limit number of 3 to 4, it is easy to select a short variation pattern. The malfunction which becomes can be suppressed.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the winning random number set by the normal hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Further, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) is used for the normal symbol when the probability is low (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability that the normal symbol is hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol type and the long time type are set as the normal symbol type, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is activated in the opening state in 0.2 seconds is 1 Per run. Further, during the time shortening and the probability variation period, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a normal symbol low probability, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and a second symbol display device (not shown). In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As shown in FIG. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the first electric combination 640a is released “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time” as normal. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. Further, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is “21 to 204”, the first electric accessory 640a is opened “1 second × 2 times” per long time.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” much shorter than that when the normal symbol has a low probability, and is further attached to the second prize opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric combination 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 84), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 83) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. , An hour / medium counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a has one execution area for special symbols and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order from the smallest area. That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable symbol display (third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the first winning opening 64 (start winning). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed in step 1). The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 77 and S405 in FIG. 79). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the number of held balls (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 or 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to an initial value of zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 81). S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203e.

  The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to ON when the gaming state is probability change.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol holding lamp (not shown), and a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the 65a opening and closing plate as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected via an input / output port 205. For these, various commands and control signals are transmitted.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, touch switch 290, selection switch 291 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a SW notice selection table 222b, a fish school selection table 222c, and a shaking operation table 222d. Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223g, input time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation degree storage area 223m, effect mode storage area 223n, At least a standby flag 223o, a touch effect effective time storage area 223q, an interval counter 223r, a volume setting storage area 223s, a volume setting flag 223t, a separation flag 223u, an operating flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z are provided. .

  The winning information storage area 223a is an area in which winning information is stored in correspondence with the holding ball based on a winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various kinds of information such as a determination result, a variation pattern, a stop type, and the like are set.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area for storing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol based on the reserved ball command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the hold ball command.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating a stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of variation patterns, various lotteries, and the like. This effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is normal. The time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is set to ON when it is determined that it is within three years from the time of manufacture, and is set OFF when it is determined that three years have passed.

  The input time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the set period of the time effect period based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292. In the input time storage area 223, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 86, S1212) in the start-up process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. In S1224, information of the time effect period is set for 24 hours.

  The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period is started. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a preparation period, and is set to OFF when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a time effect period. Is done.

  The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. The start period flag 223i2 is turned on when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a time effect period, and is turned off when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 has passed the time effect period. Is set.

  The SW effective time storage area 223j is an area for storing the SW operation effective time. In this SW effective time storage area 223j, the stored effective time is subtracted or reset in the SW effect control process (FIG. 97, S2202).

  The level storage area 223k is an area for storing upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the touch effect effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The expectation degree storage area 223m is an area for storing an expectation degree based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). .

  The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information regarding the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set). If the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode A is stored. If the current production mode is the time production period, the production mode B is stored. Mode C is stored.

  The standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog is waiting during the time effect period (in effect mode C) during the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to ON when a contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and then set to OFF by turning on the touch switch 290.

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the touch effect effective time. This touch effect effective time storage area 223q is subtracted from the stored effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated, and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

  The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314).

  The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used for the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to ON when the volume setting is possible (FIG. 93, S1905), and is set to OFF when the volume setting is completed. .

  The separation flag 223u is a flag used for the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), and is set to ON when the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (FIG. 94, S2004). When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

  The in-operation flag 223v is a flag used in the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined as the accessory driving start timing (FIG. 95, S2103). Is set to OFF when the process ends (FIG. 95, S2111).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 88) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination processing The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table 222c in the present control example. Here, the fish school notice selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of touch sensor control processing (FIG. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described in FIG. It is a table.

  By using this table, the notice effect is controlled so that the fish school notice appears with the expectation corresponding to the reliability (expectation) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62B). In this control example, the fish school notice selection table 222c is used. However, when a plurality of effects in which the degree of expectation is set according to the contact time (time effect) is provided, a table is provided to correspond to each effect.

  Further, in the fish school notice selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), it is set so that the fish notice will not appear when the degree of expectation is 0%. For example, the fish notice will appear only when the determination result is wrong. You may set to do. By configuring in this way, a player who wants a fish school notice regardless of the result of the determination of the success / failure gets bored early in the game because he / she participates in the production to intentionally lower the expectation during the contact time (time production). It becomes possible to suppress that.

  FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking motion table 222d in the first control example. This shaking motion table 222d is a table that is referred to when executing S2108 of shaking control processing (FIG. 95, S1316) described later.

  Here, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation state of the arm member 444 is configured to be grasped by information from an acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

  In the present control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the arm member 444 with reference to the swing operation table 222d. Is determined. Specifically, when the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444 is increased, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation is set. If the information of the acceleration sensor is data during right rotation, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation is set.

  That is, since the drive motor 445 is driven and controlled based on the actual rotation status by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation status) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the rotation of the drive motor 445 is controlled. Force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  In particular, in the variable member configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member, such as the arm member 444, and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state on the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end of the variable member and to drive and control the drive motor 445 based on information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  71 (b) shows only the operation table for increasing the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444. However, the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. An operation table may be provided. In this case, for example, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation is set, and the operation table for rotating the drive motor 445 may be used. With this configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the driving force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be efficiently reduced.

  Furthermore, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 in accordance with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm What is necessary is just to comprise so that rotation of the member 444) may be controlled. Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when it is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, and the worst. When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 stops).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the rotation status of the variable member based on the player's operation, and to increase the effects that the player participates in, so it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game Become.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b 111 performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads / writes data to / from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs known data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first winning opening 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a winning ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 performs voice lamp control. When the character design is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but is preliminarily stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read out, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the first electric combination 640a is opened as a normal symbol jackpot, and the ball is As it becomes easier to enter the 2-winning entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. The drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described instead. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 73). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 74 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 74).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as with the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 102B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 102 (b) S3209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 109B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 75), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 102 (b) )), The pointer update process (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 75), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 102 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3707 in FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 84. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67. Through-gate passage processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is obtained. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the held ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to execute determination of whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of one random number counter and determination of the type of jackpot. In this case, for example, the total number of random values is set to 3000, and a random number counter is used for loop counting. By providing six random numbers corresponding to the jackpot A and four random numbers corresponding to the jackpot B in the total number of 3000 random numbers, it is possible to realize the same sort as in this control example. By doing so, there is an effect that one counter can be reduced.

  In this control example, when the big hit is A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit is B, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot type out of two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type Is a big hit B, 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). Thereafter, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability variation period (S213). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), then a stop command is set (S300), and the process is terminated.

  In this control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the next jackpot game is started by setting the probability variation flag 203f to ON and setting the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability that is a probability variation period. In the meantime, when the short-time game is played and the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the hour-count-medium counter 203e, but a jackpot type different from that may be provided. For example, a jackpot type that sets a gaming state with a high probability and does not provide a short-time game, a jackpot type that sets a gaming state with a high probability and sets the hour / counter counter 203e to 100, and a probability changing counter are newly provided, 100 is set for each of the probability changing counter and the hourly / shortest hour counter, and each lottery determines whether or not the big hit type that provides a high-probability and short-time game for a predetermined number of times (100 times) and whether the high-probability gaming state continues. The jackpot type to be determined can be considered. In this way, by using various jackpot types or combining them, it becomes possible to provide a variety of gaming properties to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of gaming properties.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time reduction counter 203e (S217), and the process proceeds to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is performed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits the same match, Judged to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbols jackpot (jackpot A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), “60 to If it is in the range of “99”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times for a short period of normal symbols).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the variation time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disconnection (for a short time)”, “disconnection normal reach”, and “discovery super reach” are defined as variation patterns for disengagement. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and stored in the execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 84). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  In this control example, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, but in addition to this, the variation type for each number of retained symbols stored in the special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a. A counter may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the number of reserved items and the variation type counter.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. That is, a winning is detected when a ball is detected three times (6 milliseconds) in the timer interruption process executed every 2 milliseconds. Note that, in the switch reading process S101, when it is configured to be able to determine the state in which the switch is continuously detected for a predetermined period, it is possible to eliminate the need to execute three timer interrupt processes in this process. .

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). And it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than an upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reservation ball number counter. One is added to the value (N1) of 203c (S404). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the second winning opening 640 (S407). Here, the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

  Then, there is no winning at the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter One is added to the value (N2) of 203c (S410). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S411, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, prefetching is executed to set a winning command, and this process is terminated. Here, the prefetching executed in S413 will be described. Prefetching is based on game information stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) This is a pre-reading process for determining in advance a determination (presence / absence determination) executed at the start of fluctuation.

  In the prefetch process, a determination is made in advance based on the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, and the determination result is set as a winning command. This winning command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, as with other commands, and is output to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84). Is done.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs a predetermined notification to the player in advance using the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the stage before the fluctuation is started. Is possible.

  In this control example, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes a prefetch process, and the process result (determination result) is output to the voice lamp controller 113 as a winning command, but is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The stored game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or information corresponding to the game information is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The pre-reading process described above may be executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this way, the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and the second symbol variation display or second prize opening 640 performed in the second symbol display device (not shown). It is a process for controlling the opening time etc. of the 1st electrically-driven accessory 640a which accompanies. As described above, the control of the opening time of the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 is also performed at the same time, but the control content is the same as that of the first electric accessory 640a, and thus the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device is in the middle of the display indicating the hit, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour / short counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON. This is because in this control example, when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. Therefore, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 and the probability variation flag 203f is not set to ON, the process proceeds to the process of S611. When the value is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the process proceeds to S609.

  In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 21-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls out The number of opening times and the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device starts the variation display being executed. Determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric combination 640a is set by the process of S625, the first electric combination opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, passage of a sphere in the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203d (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (usage areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets initial values (S914), and starts payout control of game balls. It becomes possible. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 76) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) and the start winning process (see FIG. 79) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the first electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. . The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S620 in FIG. 80 or the processing of S621 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. Note that the second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is also subjected to the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 78), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 78). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of a second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 80) (lighted display). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 82 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a use area that are backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initial setting process (see FIG. 83, S901). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85 to FIG. 99, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1320 (see FIG. 87) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), it executes a power-off process in S1320. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after an instantaneous power failure, and the power-off in S1320 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1320, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1320 is executed (see S1319 in FIG. 87). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1320 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211). Thereafter, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. (S1211). Thereafter, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1212, a time setting process is executed (S1212). The time setting process (S1212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and a process of setting the preparation period and the time effect period in the input time storage area 223h based on the time information is executed.

  In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. Note that the RTC 292 is a timing unit having a battery inside, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas, or to control to display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the term data (S1222). Here, the term data is set to three years within three and a half years which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC 292 in this control example. A date three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture is set as the time limit data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that a delay or the like occurs in time due to a lack of battery capacity or the like, and the start timing of the time effect cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the date is three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture, and the time effect execution flag 223g described later is set to ON. When the voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined and the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. Also good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC 292 to a voltage value that allows the RTC 292 to operate normally.

  If it is determined in the process of S1222 that the acquired time information is outside the deadline data, that is, three years or more have elapsed (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the input time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in this control example, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 54 minutes from the predetermined time set in a state where the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the subsequent minute is the preparation period (effect mode B). ), 5 minutes after the lapse of the preparation period is set as the time effect period (effect mode C). After the time effect period of 5 minutes has elapsed, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and thereafter, each period is similarly set.

  In this control example, each period is set as described above, but when the first predetermined time is reached based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292, it corresponds to the normal game period (effect mode A). When the second predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed, and when the third predetermined time is reached, the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed. It may be set in time series based on the time information. By doing in this way, even if an error occurs in the time to turn on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to perform the same effect at a predetermined time. . In addition, since the RTC 292 is used, there is no error in the time information (time information) to be measured even if the power-on time is deviated.

  The details of each of the above-described periods will be described later. In the normal game period and the time effect period, the type of the background image on which the displayed preview contents and special symbols are displayed is switched. In addition, the preparation period is a period for preparing to switch from the normal game period to the time effect period, and before changing to the time effect period, the change of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. It is set to be.

  In this control example, based on the acquired time information, a 24 hour preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the input time storage area 223h. It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, measure the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the passage of 54 minutes. In addition, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Further, the execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time effect period may be started based on the player performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing in this way, when friends play a game on the adjacent platform, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the predetermined operation described above. .

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the change display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 ends, a synchronized effect management process (S1313) is executed. Details of this synchronized effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. After this synchronized effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, a volume setting process is executed (S1314). Details of the volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1314 ends, a left / right selection process (S1315) is executed. The left / right selection process (S1315) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315) is executed, the shaking control process is executed (S1316). Details of the shaking control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1316 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1320). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). Details of this variation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, a notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). The advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the processing of S1404 is completed, processing according to other commands is executed (S1412), and this processing is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the variation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1403).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by one every time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (S1502).

  Here, the present control example is configured such that the production mode A, the production mode B, and the production mode C are set. Each production mode is configured to be set every time a predetermined time elapses after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and a game is started. For 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the production mode A is set as the normal game period, and after 54 minutes, the production mode B is set as the preparation period for the next 1 minute, and after 1 minute of the preparation period, Production mode C is set as a time production period for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of the time effect period has elapsed, effect mode A, which is a normal game period, is set again, and effect mode B and effect mode C are set repeatedly.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the same time by switching the effect mode every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. By doing so, the timing at which the effect mode is switched between the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be adjusted. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  If it is determined that the production mode A is set (that is, the normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or variation pattern selection table B Based on the determination result (see FIG. 69), the variation pattern is selected and set based on the determination result, the number of holds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1503), and this processing is terminated.

  In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the production mode A is not set (S1502: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) ( S1504), the process is terminated. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set, and characters “Soon contact time start !!” indicating that it is the preparation period are displayed on the background. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which the background image is counted down for 1 minute is executed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long the time production period starts later.

  Details will be described in a notice selection process (see FIG. 90) described later, but the notice effect is not set in the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time effect period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and the notice effect different from the dedicated notice effect set in the time effect period is displayed. Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, details of the notice selection process (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the notice selection process (S1404).

  In the notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). If the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this process ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON in order to prevent the notice effect from being set when it is determined that the preparation period is in a synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 92) described later.

  On the other hand, if the preparation period flag 223i1 is not set to ON in the process of S1601 (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the pattern is a super reach variation pattern (S1602). If it is not a super reach variation pattern (S1602: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (S1602: Yes), an effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). Thereafter, a preliminary lottery is executed based on the set expectation degree and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fish school notice is selected (S1605). When the fish school notice is not selected (S1605: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fish school notice is selected (S1605: Yes), a display command indicating the fish school notice is set (S1606), and this process ends. Note that the set expectation used in S1604 is set in S2332 of FIG. 99 to be described later, and details will be described later.

  Here, returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S1401 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412. Move on to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). If the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and set in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1409). After the process of S1409 is completed, the process proceeds to S1412. In the processing of S1408, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1410). When the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1412.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original value of each of the counters C1 to C2 is obtained from the original value separately from the big special lottery drawing of the special symbol. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1410, if a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process corresponding to the received command is executed ( S1412), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. Obtain (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. Further, the notice contents selected here are also notified.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. The display for acquiring and notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 as it is is set as the stop type of the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708). A stop type command for use is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1709 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the synchronous effect management process (S1313) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous production management process (S1313), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a preparation period or a time production period, and a production mode indicating it is set. Run.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1801). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after acquiring time information of “hour, minute” from the RTC 292 (S1802), is the start period flag 223i2 turned on? It is determined (S1803). When it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is OFF (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is a preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804). . If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), it is then determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805).

  If it is determined by the processing of S1805 that it is not the time effect period, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the processing of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to OFF ( Then, the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). Thereafter, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode C (time effect period) is set (S1809), and this process ends. In addition, the display control apparatus 114 performs the process which switches the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to the display mode corresponding to a time production period based on having received this command.

  Returning to S1804, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1804, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the processing of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the production mode B is set in the production mode storage area 223n (S1811). Thereafter, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode B (preparation period) is set (S1812), and this process ends. In addition, the display control apparatus 114 performs the process which switches the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to a preparation period based on having received this command.

  Also, in the preparation period, a special background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters “Soon contact time starts !!” indicating that it is the preparation period are displayed on the background. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, a time display in which the background image is counted down for 1 minute is executed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long the time production period starts later.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1803 that the start period flag 223i2 is on (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). If it is determined that it is not outside the time effect period (S1813: No), this process ends. When it is determined that it is outside the time effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to OFF (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying display control device 114 that it is effect mode A is set (S1816). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In addition, the display control apparatus 113 performs the process which switches the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to the display mode of a normal production period based on having received this command.

  Next, the volume setting process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the sound volume setting process (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player is executed.

  In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the production mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). If the effect mode is not mode A (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the production mode is mode A (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a reach establishment period (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period means that the combination of the third symbol that is a big hit in the state in which two symbol sequences are stopped and displayed among the three symbol sequences variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped. This is a period in which a state (reach state) in which there is a possibility of being displayed is established.

  If the determination result in S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), it is then determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). If the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is next determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 has not been operated (S1904: No), this process ends. If the selection switch 291 is operated (S1904: Yes), then the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), and a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906). Exit.

  If the volume setting flag 223t is on in the processing of S1903 (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is increased and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1908), and a display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This process ends.

  In the processing of S1907, when the upper selection switch 291a is not operated (S1907: No), it is then determined whether or not the lower selection switch 291 is operated (S1910). If the lower selection switch 291b has not been operated (S1910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the lower selection switch is operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1911), and a display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). The process ends.

  As described above, the sound volume setting process (S1314) is set to a specific period (effect mode A) even when the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In a state where the reach is not established), the operation means (selection switch 291) that can be operated by the player is enabled, and the sound volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can be set only in a state where the third symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (so-called demo screen display state or standby screen state). Can be set even when the third graphic is being displayed in a variable manner, and the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  Moreover, in this control example, when the production mode is set to other than A, the volume is not set. This is a mode in which an effect is executed based on time information acquired from the RTC 292, such as the effect mode B and the effect mode C, and control for synchronizing the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 may be performed. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronized effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 (for example, the volume of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is indicated that the car is approaching from a distance). This is because the effect balance is lost in the control effect).

  Although not shown, when the production mode is set to B or C, the output of the volume related to the synchronous production ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronous production. A predetermined volume level is output. With this configuration, even if different volume levels are set in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronized performance, and the player is interested in the performance. It becomes possible to have.

  Furthermore, the predetermined volume level output during the above-described synchronized performance is set to be lower than the volume level that is the reference value in the normal state (the volume is reduced). This is because the same sound is often output simultaneously from a plurality of pachinko machines 10 during the synchronized performance.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by a digital signal (a pattern in which the output volume is output to the speaker as a digital signal), the volume control related to the synchronized effect can be performed by the above-described control. In the case of control (a pattern for adjusting the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker by controlling the output section of the speaker), based on the set volume level so that the volume related to the synchronization effect becomes an appropriate volume. Thus, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to output a suitable sound volume regarding a synchronous production.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 performs control capable of outputting the sound output corresponding to the synchronized effect at an appropriate sound volume regardless of the set sound volume level, the effect mode is set. The volume may be set even when the state is not set to A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a more desired volume.

  In addition, this control example is configured so that the volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is because after the reach is established, the movable accessory provided on the game board 13 is driven, or the third symbol display device is producing an effect of expecting a big hit, This is because the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced and the pachinko machine 10 is executed as a whole so that the production can be enjoyed.

  In the present control example, the volume can be set while the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the volume setting can be used for game play. For example, if the lottery result is the 3rd symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is a big hit, and the volume setting is performed when the large volume effect that notifies the big hit is set at the end of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, It is conceivable that a notification such as “Because a loud sound is generated in the current fluctuation!” Is reported. By giving such a notification, it is possible to suggest a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display, and also to be used as a reference for setting the volume, and while the player enjoys the game, he can enjoy more than desired. It is possible to prevent in advance that a large volume of sound is generated. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent a sudden loud sound from being generated from the pachinko machine 10, even a person with a weak heart can play a game with peace of mind.

  Further, since the third figure is configured so that the volume can be set during the variable display, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the variable display. Therefore, as a result of setting the volume level during the display of the demonstration screen as in the prior art, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate the problem that the volume of the BGM during the fluctuation display becomes larger than expected and gives discomfort.

  Further, in this control example, only the volume setting process based on the player's operation is described, but the volume setting may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, operating hours (opening time and closing time) are input to the pachinko machine 10 by operating the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291. When the time information acquired from the RTC 292 reaches the closing time, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level, and when the time information acquired from the RTC 292 reaches the opening time, the volume level is reduced to a predetermined reference level or during the business hours of the previous day. It is better to automatically return to the set volume level. With this configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output by the pachinko machine 10 during maintenance work performed outside business hours, and to prevent the maintenance worker from feeling uncomfortable. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level during the time effect period that is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, and the result of the mini game executed during the time effect period or the time effect period is executed. The volume level may be controlled to increase based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, surrounding players will also pay attention to the pachinko machine 10 with a high volume during the time production period, and the player who is playing with the pachinko machine 10 with the increased volume has a sense of superiority. Can be soaked.

  Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to control the volume level to be increased based on the result of the prefetch process based on the winning command. By doing this, the game can be played in a state where the expectation for the big win is increased by grasping the change in the volume level before the display of the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is the big win is started. It is possible to focus on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the left / right selection process (S1315) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the left / right selection processing (S1315). This left / right selection process is a process that is executed when the player uses the left / right sensor device 600 (first sensor 610, second sensor 620) to produce an effect of allowing the player to select one of the alternatives (left / right) (FIG. 60).

  Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. The left / right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (presence), position, operation direction, and operation speed thereof. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a.

  The irradiation areas (detection areas) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so that they partially overlap each other as shown in the irradiation areas S1 and S2 in FIG. In this way, the presence of the player's fingers can be detected in a wide continuous area.

  In this control example, the irradiation region (detection region) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation region (detection region) is set in this way is divided into left and right by lowering the central play unit 400, and the player is An effect for selecting one of the choices is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for causing the player to select one of two alternatives is the left / right selection process.

  In the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), first, it is determined whether or not it is the left / right selection timing (S2001). This left / right selection timing is a case where the left / right selection effect is included in the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed is shown.

  If it is not the left / right selection timing in the process of S2001 (S2001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the left / right selection timing (S2001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). When the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), thereafter, the lowering of the central idle unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set to on (S2004), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2002, when the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), it is then determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). If the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the left selection is set (S2006), then the separation flag 223u is set to off (S2007), and this process ends. .

  In the process of S2005, when the left sensor is off (S2005: No), it is then determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, the common detection area is formed so that at least a part of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 overlap each other. Makes it possible to reliably detect the player's operation over a wide range by making the detection area formed continuously by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 into one detection area. In the case of performing an effect, at least the above-described shared detection area is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor device 600 by allowing a movable accessory (variable member) to enter between the glass plate 16a and the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are divided.

  With this configuration, when the player performs an effect game in which the player touches the glass plate 16a without changing the left and right sensor device 600 (or brings his fingers closer), a wide range of touch operations by the player is continuous. In the case of performing an effect game in which the player makes an alternative choice, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are separated, and the player It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

  In the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed, and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do it. In this way, the detection area can be moved.

  By configuring in this way, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the region not covered with the movable accessory in the third symbol display device 81. Can be used as a detection region of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Thereby, the display “touch” is performed in the display area not covered with the movable accessory, and the movable object is the third by making the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area the detection area of each sensor. Even in a situation where the display area of the symbol display device is covered, it is possible to inform the player of the detection area in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that the production can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 610 are operated by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 that can be operated by the player provided in the pachinko machine 10. A function capable of adjusting the detection region of the sensor 620 may be provided. By doing in this way, a player can perform an effect only by touching a desired position of the plate glass 16a.

  Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that the current detection region is unknown. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player hits the detection area of the first sensor 610.

  In the case of performing such an effect, it is preferable to touch the area of the second sensor 620 before touching the detection area of the first sensor 610. In addition, as a bonus, a special video or a privilege that can acquire a large amount of points accumulated by a player or information that can acquire a large amount of points can be considered. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect that the player can actually participate in, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by the player's fingers and reflected. It is configured to detect the player's finger by receiving the light at the light receiving unit, but other methods may be adopted as long as the sensor can detect the movement of the finger.

  For example, a plurality of sensing axes are formed in the detection area, and a human sensor that detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axis or a type of dielectric that has polarization is a focus. Electric current that is generated by receiving infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) emitted from the human body on the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body (current generated in accordance with a change in the charge state) A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects a finger on the basis thereof is conceivable.

  When a pyroelectric infrared sensor is used, it is preferable to mount the pyroelectric element on a dome-shaped lens in order to provide directivity in the detection direction. The pyroelectric element may be composed of an inorganic ceramic material (such as lead zirconate titanate (PZT)) or an organic material (such as polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film made of PVDF, it is possible to configure an infrared sensor as a flexible plastic film, and thus it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

  Further, by arranging a plurality of such elements, it is possible to detect the high-speed movement and movement direction of fingers, and it is also possible to detect gesture operations that move fingers. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect that the player can actually participate in, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. As other sensors, a non-contact photoelectric sensor, a capacitive proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the shake control process (S1316) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the shaking control process (S1316). This shaking control process is a process executed when the central floating unit 400 is shaken using the drive motor 450.

  Here, the variable control (operation control) of the variable member (central floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed of a stepping motor. A stepping motor rotates in steps of a certain angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with an input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (number of steps) and pulse speed (frequency). The rotation amount and rotation speed of the motor are controlled, and the variable member can be moved and controlled.

  And each variable member is comprised so that it may each change by receiving the drive of the transmission means (gear) interlock | cooperated with the rotational drive of the stepping motor mentioned above. The sound lamp control device 113 is provided with drive motor control means for outputting a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to the minimum unit in which the variable member is variable (unit in which the gear serving as the transmission means rotates by one tooth). It has been.

  First, the movable control of the arm body 430 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank gear 453 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The variable member mounted on the arm body 430 is configured to be variable based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). Based on the state in which the origin detection sensor detects the origin, the position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the number of rotations (number of steps) of the drive motor 450.

  Next, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). Note that an origin detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is mounted. The position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the rotational speed (number of steps) of the drive motor 445 with reference to the state where the limited detection sensor detects the origin.

  That is, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to operate in a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motor 450 (two pieces) and the drive motor 445, respectively (FIGS. 31, 33, and 33). 34, FIG. 37, and FIG. 39).

  Further, in this control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for a member configured to be variable, so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, the variable member can be controlled normally by comparing the position (assumed position) of the variable member calculated from the rotation speed (step number) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor. It is possible to determine whether it has been performed. If the assumed position and the current position are different, a movement failure due to the step-out of the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is considered.

  Returning to FIG. 95, the description will be continued. In the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101). This accessory driving start timing is when the effect of shaking the accessory is included in the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, it shows the timing at which the effect of shaking the accessory is executed. When it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the in-operation flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this process ends.

  In addition, although the figure demonstrates the case where the accessory driving start timing performed based on a fluctuation pattern is set, it can set an accessory driving start timing other than that, for example by operating the frame button 22 You may comprise as follows.

  If it is not the accessory driving start timing in the processing of S2101 (S2101: No), it is then determined whether the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104). If the in-operation flag 223v is off (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not the scenario is a shaking operation (S2106). If the scenario is a shaking motion (S2106: Yes), information on the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), shaking motion data is set from the shaking motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the information of the acceleration sensor is the left rotation data, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is the left rotation is set, and when the acceleration sensor information is the right rotation data, the arm member is set. Rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is right rotation is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, when it is not a scenario of shaking motion (S2106: No), this process is terminated. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether it is a scenario end (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a scenario end (S2109: Yes), the in-operation flag 223v is set to OFF (S2110), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, when the control of swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is determined based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444. Has been decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation state) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the drive motor 445 can be driven and controlled based on the actual rotation state. The rotational force of 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  In particular, in the variable member configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member, such as the arm member 444, and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state on the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end of the variable member and to drive and control the drive motor 445 based on information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  Note that the swing control of the variable member may be performed using the frame button 22. In this case, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 in accordance with the timing of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm The rotation of the member 444) is controlled. Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member, and the worst timing is detected. When the button is pressed, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 stops).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the rotation status of the variable member based on the player's operation, and to increase the effects that the player participates in, so it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 87, S1307), it is first determined whether or not the production mode is A (S2201). If it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), a SW effect control process described later is executed (S2202), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S2201: No), a special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the SW effect control process (S2202) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the SW effect control process (S2202). In the SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in a normal period (effect mode A) that is a period other than a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed is executed.

  In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether or not the SW valid time is longer than 0 (S2301). If the SW valid time is 0 (S2301: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S2301, if the SW effective time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW effective time stored in the SW effective time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is subtracted. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (the touch switch 290, the selection switch 291) is pressed (S2303). If the frame button 22 or the like has not been pressed (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected display advance command is set (S2304), and the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is reset ( In step S2305, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special SW effect control process (S2203) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this special SW effect control process (S2203). In the special SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed is executed.

  In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is in a standby state during the time effect period. That is, the standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect is selected in the time effect period. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

  If it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display status command indicating that the standby flag 223o is off is set (S2314). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2312, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2311 that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is longer than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and then this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 99, the touch sensor control process (S2316) which is one process in the special SW effect control process (see FIG. 98) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the touch sensor control process (S2316). In the touch sensor control process (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is turned on (S2322). When the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). Thereafter, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  If it is determined in step S2322 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328). ). When the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the level storage area 223k (S2329). Thereafter, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  In the processing of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). If the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), the expectation degree based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation degree storage area 223m (S2332). Thereafter, a display command indicating that the degree of expectation has been set is set (S2333), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (S2901 in FIG. 101). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3002 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. And after repeating several times including the process of S3002, you may make it perform the process of S3003-S3005.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2903, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2904). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2904, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 109A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that a power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn. Determination processing (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and simple display setting processing (see S3209 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), and the main control device gives an instruction to start the variation effect. 110, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the display is simplified. Fluctuation effects can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2905, interrupt permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 102B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 75) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S3201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3202), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3203), based on the content of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3206). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3205) are used. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3209) is executed, and the process of S3204 is performed. Migrate to

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S3202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 103, S3202), as shown in FIG. 103, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301). (S3301: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S3305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3403, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3406), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3405, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3402. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3304 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a display stop type command (S3306: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3307), and the process returns to S3301.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S3502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S3503).

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S3306 (S3306: No), it is then determined whether there is a display pending command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). If it is determined that the display hold command has been received (S3308: Yes), the hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbol is displayed or the color of the displayed reserved symbol is set to be variable. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display hold command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display notice command (S3310). If it is determined that there is a display notice command (S3310: Yes), notice display data based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed and display settings such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice are set. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display notice command (S3310: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (S3312). If it is determined that there is a display state command (S3312: Yes), background display data corresponding to the state based on the command is set (S3313). Thereby, the display corresponding to time production etc. is set. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether there is a display touch command (S3314). If it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). Thereby, a display corresponding to a touch effect such as a contact effect is set. Thereafter, the processing returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3316), and if there is an error command (S3316). : Yes), an error command process is executed (S3318), and the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the error command process (S3318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3601). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3602). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3601, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3602 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3602, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3316 that there is no error command (S3316: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3317), and the processing returns to S3301.

  In the process of S3301 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes). ), The processing of S3302 to S3317 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3301 to S3307 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S3301 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)) are performed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3401. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, details of the display setting process (S3203) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S3702 to S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3701: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3702), and then S3703 to S3704. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3703). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3704).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3801).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to S3705.

  In S3705, pointer update processing is executed (S3705). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3901, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3903). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3905), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3903 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3906, the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3902: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3906 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3709).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3709: No), the confirmed display data table is not stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3710), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3714), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S3204), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop change determination flag set in S3715 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3716). If the demo display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3717), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3718). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3716, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3716: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 109A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4001, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). FIG. 109B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4101), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4101: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4102). In the process of S4102, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S 4102 (S 4102: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to S4103. Also, as a result of the process of S4101, if the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4103.

  In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4103). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206), and the image controller 237 is described in the drawing list. Based on the transferred data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4103 (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3705) of the display setting process (S3203) executed previously is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202). If it is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4203) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205.

  In the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4202: No), the process of S4203 and S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

  In the process of S4206, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S4206 (S4206: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Also, as a result of the process of S4205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4205: No), the process proceeds to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207). If the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so there is a transfer start flag. Is turned off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4207: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4212). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4212: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4213), the back image provided for each back image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4214). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the storage destination (normal) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4215), and the process proceeds to S4209.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S4209, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The determination in the processing of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4210). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206), and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4210, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described drawing process (S3206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In the second control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the first control example. The variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control process in addition to the process performed in the first control example described above, and the addition of the reel control process, and The difference is that a new process is added to the variable display setting process. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

  First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112A is an example showing a display mode in a state where the container 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. 112 (a), the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as the main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the container 330 and the first symbol A third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sub-third symbol) synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotor 340b is displayed at the same time. This display mode is executed by raising the container 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. Is the display mode.

  In this display mode, three main third symbols and three sub-third symbols are respectively displayed in the left-right direction, and the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed in correspondence with each other. That is, the main 3rd symbol in the left column (the symbol displaying 4 and 7) corresponds to the sub 3rd symbol in the left column (the symbol in which A and A 'are combined and displayed). The main 3rd symbol in the row (blank symbol) corresponds to the secondary 3rd symbol in the middle row (the symbol in which C and B 'are combined and displayed), and the main 3rd symbol in the right column (blank symbol). Corresponds to the sub third symbol (the symbol in which C and A ′ are combined and displayed) in the right column.

  The sub 3rd symbol has "A and A '", "B and B'" and "C and C '" as specific combinations, and all 3 sub 3rd symbols are "A and A'". When the composite display is made, it is informed that the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, when all of the three sub-third symbols are combined and displayed as “B and B ′” or “C and C ′”, a notification is made to make the player expect a big hit, for example, “B and B”. It is configured to display “Cha N Su” by arranging three sub-third symbols that are combined and displayed with “′”.

  FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which the right and third right symbols are switched after FIG. 112 (a) is displayed. As shown in this figure, when displaying the main 3rd symbol and the sub 3rd symbol, the special symbol's success / failure judgment result is displayed by the combination of the respective symbols. If the judgment result is a big hit, the combination that gives a big hit for the special symbol success / failure judgment result (a combination of three shark / turtle symbols) is displayed in the main third symbol, and the special symbol is judged in the secondary third symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols combined and displayed by A and A ′ are arranged) is displayed.

  As described above, in this control example, in the normal gaming state, the determination result of the special symbol is determined using the third symbol that is variably displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When a transition is made to the reel mode, which is a gaming state different from the normal gaming state, a special combination is made by combining the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-described sub third symbol. It is configured to be able to notify the symbol determination result.

  Note that the above-described conditions for shifting to the reel mode include the case where the determination result of the special symbol is a predetermined determination result (big win), or the reel mode in the variation pattern command or winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113. Production information corresponding to may be included.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, a reel scenario table 222e is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart for the main process 2. Among the main processes 2, the processes of S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 are the same as the processes of S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 of the main process (see FIG. 87) in the first control example, respectively. Since the process is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. The difference will be described below.

  The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330) which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). If the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). Thereafter, the setting start flag 223w is set to off (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to on (S2405), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the setting start flag 223w is off in the process of S2401 (S2401: No), it is then determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). If the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the data is end data (S2408). If it is end data (S2408: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not end data (S2408: No), operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart for the variation pattern selection process 2.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). If the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). If the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), the variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B and set (S1514). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. In the reel scenario table, a table that is referred to in an effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a change pattern command is received ) Are separately provided.

  In S1515, the reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection process is referred to. The reel scenario table includes a position (exposed position) where the player can visually recognize the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a position (storage position) where the player cannot visually recognize the reel member. A plurality of scenarios in which the reel position to determine the position to be positioned and the rotation speed of the reel member as the rotation speed are determined in advance are prepared. Based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount Are appropriately selected and set (see FIG. 134 (a)).

  In the processing of S1512, when the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), a variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C (S1516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the variable display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1340). Of the variable display setting process 2, the same processes as S1701 to S1709 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example are executed in the processes of S1711 to S1719. Detailed description is omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and will be described below.

  In the process of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is a reel mode entry pattern (S1720). When it is a reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this process is terminated. Note that the reel mode entry pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command when the determination result of special symbol is a big hit includes more stop type selection commands than the stop type selection command when the determination result of special symbol is not a big hit. ing.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a reel mode end pattern (S1722). If it is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to OFF (S1723), and this process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 133. In the third control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the second control example. Specifically, a point where a prize change process is added to the above-described command determination process, a point where a volume setting process 2 is added, a point where a special effect process is added, and a point where a shake control process 2 is added This is different in that other processing is added. Since the other configuration is the same, the description of the other configuration is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 118, the display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described. Here, the special volume setting effect will be described. The special volume setting effect is an effect that occurs based on the ball being entered, and during the period in which the effect is occurring, the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) (see FIG. 130). When the sound volume is set by this special sound volume setting, the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the special jackpot expectation degree of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the holding symbol are special voice, sound volume or display mode. It is comprised so that it may alert | report using.

  According to the special sound volume setting effect configured as described above, notification that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot is also executed by the operation of setting the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, two types of settings, volume setting and expectation suggestion notification (production setting), are enabled based on one operation performed by the player, and the frame button 22 (operation means) performed for the player to enjoy the game can be set. There is an effect that the number of operations can be reduced.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special sound volume setting effect. As shown in the figure, when the special sound volume setting effect is executed, a part of the sub-symbol (blank symbol) is changed to a volume symbol indicating the sound volume setting and displayed. During this special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area in which the volume symbol is displayed, and the player is placed on the glass plate 16a corresponding to the volume symbol. A special volume can be set by touching.

  When the special volume setting is enabled, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided in the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol displayed on the display screen is changed to a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the volume level and displayed.

  Further, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol is changed to a display mode according to the jackpot expectation level of the special symbol whose display mode is fluctuating or the jackpot expectation level in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the volume design color is changed from white to blue to yellow to red to rainbow. In addition to changing the color as a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation, for example, changing the type of the pattern displayed on the volume symbol, or changing the form of the symbol mark displayed on the volume symbol It is possible to change the number or increase the number.

  Furthermore, as a notification effect based on the degree of expectation of jackpot, not only the display mode of the volume symbol may be changed, but notification using voice (volume) may be performed, for example, an operation for raising the volume level is performed. Regardless, a contradiction effect that the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, or a notification sound effect that notifies that the hit determination result has a jackpot may be performed. Thus, when the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation degree is performed using sound, so that different categories of the volume setting and the notification effect can be related. This makes it possible to make the player who has set the volume aware of the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation.

  In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is described as the special volume setting effect, but the same control may be used in addition to the volume setting. For example, you may use when setting the brightness | luminance and hue of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (liquid crystal display device). When adopting such a configuration, the sub-pattern (blank symbol) is changed to a light symbol indicating luminance or a color bar symbol indicating hue, and the above-described symbol display mode is used as a notification effect based on the degree of expectation of jackpot. In addition to the effect to be changed, notification may be made using a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided in the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation is executed with visual notification effects (lamp brightness and hue) based on an operation performed by the player to change the visual settings (brightness and hue). It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the notification effect.

  In addition, a plurality of sub symbols (blank symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed to volume symbols, light symbols, and color bar symbols, respectively, so that settings corresponding to the symbols selected by the player are performed. May be.

  In this control example, it is configured to change the sub symbol that is displayed in a stopped state and a part of the sub symbol that is displayed in a variable manner to a volume symbol, but only the sub symbol that is displayed in a stopped state can be changed to a volume symbol. Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the sub-symbol during the variable display can be changed to the volume symbol. Moreover, you may make it alert | report a jackpot expectation degree based on the volume setting operation in normal time.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which whether or not the player has touched the volume symbol is determined based on the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600, but the volume symbol is obtained by an operation using an operating means other than the left and right sensor device 600. You may make it the structure which discriminate | determines that it selected.

  As described above, in the special volume setting effect in this control example, the player performs only the operation of setting the volume, and the state suggestion notification effect that suggests the jackpot expectation level is also performed. It is possible to suppress the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291) from being complicated.

  Moreover, since the aspect using the sound is used as the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, the player can easily notice the state suggestion notification effect.

  Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing for executing the time effect period. First, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the current time information is the time measuring means by the time setting process (see FIG. 86) in the start-up process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC 292. Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period (effect mode B) is set after 54 minutes have elapsed. Note that the normal game period (effect mode A) is set for the period until the preparation period is set. Then, when one minute has elapsed since the preparation period (effect mode B) is set, the time effect period (effect mode C) is set. Thereafter, the normal game period is set again after 5 minutes have elapsed since the time effect period (effect mode C) was set.

  In this control example, the player acquires points during the normal game period (production mode A1), displays the results of the points acquired during the preparation period (production mode B), and performs time production according to the acquired points. The content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) is changed, and the effect of changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) is performed based on the result of the time effect.

  Next, the detailed contents of effects in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. Note that description of the same effects as those described in the first control example is omitted.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, in order for the player to earn points. It is a figure which shows the mini game performed. Three treasure chests are arranged in the center of the display screen, and above that, a comment for prompting the player to select an arbitrary treasure chest is displayed. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure chest, a display mode showing points appears from the selected treasure chest and is added to the player's earned points.

  Further, on this display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum acquirable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as “10/100” in the lower left of the screen. The contents of the time effect executed during the subsequent time effect period are determined in accordance with the points acquired during the normal game period.

  Furthermore, an acquisition point indicator with a maximum value set to 100 points is displayed in the vicinity of the area where the acquisition points are displayed, and it is visually shown how much the current acquisition points are relative to the maximum value. It is possible to grasp. Further, this indicator is provided with boundary lines at the points indicating the number of acquired points 40, 70, 90, and the characters “GET” are displayed for the respective boundary lines. In the figure, a display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

  This boundary line indicates a value at which a table (see FIG. 125 (a)) used when determining the content of a time effect (effect performed in effect mode C) to be performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in a manner that is visible to the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required until there is a possibility of changing the time performance while using the boundary line as the target value. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the mini game can be increased.

  Further, the display of the number of acquired points on the indicator is configured so that the color changes when the boundary line is exceeded. In the present control example, the above-described two displays for the earned points are performed, but only one of them may be displayed.

  In addition to the mini game shown in FIG. 120 (a), this control example is configured so that points can be obtained even in a normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b). Therefore, FIG. 120B will be described.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect “Fish Reach”. FIG. When “fish school reach” is executed, “fish school GET + 20 points” is displayed on the display screen, and 20 acquired points are added. In this way, even if it is a normal game effect, it is possible to earn points when a specific effect is executed, so it is possible to accumulate points even if the mini game cannot be operated well. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effects that occur during the normal game period.

  In addition, about the point which can be acquired by normal game production, it is good to comprise so that the specific production to which the number of points and a point are given can be set up at random. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to display on the display screen the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the current normal game period. In addition, when all the effects set as the specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege that sets the acquired points to MAX may be provided.

  Also, it may be configured not to add a part of the points on the display without displaying all the points obtained by executing the mini game or the specific effects during the normal game period, for example, , It is good to acquire and display fewer points than the points actually earned in the mini game, or to display a part of the effect set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display . With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the specific number of points earned, and the production can be enjoyed until the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)).

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and is the points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which announces the result of a number. In the upper area of the display screen, a comment for notifying that “contact time”, which is a time effect, will start soon is displayed, and in the right area of the display screen, the remaining time until the time effect is started (35 A countdown display unit that counts down seconds) is provided. When the numerical value (seconds) displayed on the countdown display unit becomes 0, the time effect period (effect mode C) is entered and the time effect is started.

  Furthermore, the left area of this display screen is provided with an acquisition point result display section for displaying the result of the number of points acquired during the normal game period (effect mode A1), and the points acquired during the normal game period are displayed. Is done. In addition, when it is configured not to display all the points acquired during the normal game period on the display screen, it is only during the normal game period that the result of the number of points displayed in the result display part of this figure is seen. The number of points earned can be grasped.

  FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (effect mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and is the points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen on which the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (refer FIG. 125 (a)) using a number is displayed. In the upper area of the display screen, a comment indicating that the dog type used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) has been determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog type display unit for displaying the currently determined dog type is provided, and a dog type C is displayed as a dog type used during the next time production period. In addition, the countdown display section displays the remaining 9 seconds.

  Here, the dog breed used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breed A to dog breed D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time production period, and are selected and determined by a dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) described later. Each dog breed has individuality, and the degree of increase in reliability in the production during the contact time (during time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, for the breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set to “normal”, and the effect that allows custom setting of the reliability is set as “fish reach”.

  In this control example, the kind of production that can set the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability can be customized for each dog type. However, the player can set the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability as a custom setting. You may enable it to select the kind of production which can be performed. In such a case, for example, when dog breed D is selected, the range that can be selected decreases, and when dog breed A is selected, the range that can be selected increases. With this configuration, the player plays a game such that the dog breed A is set to perform various custom settings.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that game aspects other than the game aspect (type of reach, reliability) described in this control example can be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of a premier effect in a variable display in which the determination result is a big hit, the appearance rate of an effect capable of giving a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and the like can be considered.

  In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period in which points are acquired (effect mode A1) and a period in which an effect based on the contents set in the time effect is executed (effect mode A2). However, for example, the player may be able to select which period to execute during the normal game period at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time effect period). With this configuration, if a desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it becomes possible to select a period for acquiring points again, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

  Also, the normal game period may be divided into a first half part and a second half part, the first half part may be a period for performing the production based on the contents set during the time production period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points. Both the period to acquire and the period to perform the production based on the content set in the time production may be overlapped, and both may be performed simultaneously.

  Furthermore, the points acquired during the normal game period may be accumulated all day, and the contents of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play a long game. In addition, information (for example, a password) created based on information read by the external device by converting the acquired points into information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can be read by an external terminal (portable device) May be input to the pachinko machine 10 so that a game in which the previous acquired points are taken over can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who has no time to play a long game across the day.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the detailed contents of the effect in the shaking effect 2 will be described. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, and the player uses an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40), which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges | operates to operate the frame button 22 with sufficient timing to shake.

  Here, the shaking effect 2 will be described. The shaking effect 2 is an effect of moving the arm member 444 slightly shaking based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. More specifically, the timing at which the movable state (swing state) data of the arm member 444 is calculated from information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444, and the operation timing is notified on the display screen based on the calculated data. Display notifications. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swing state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444. It is.

  In the shaking effect 2 described above, when the player operates the frame button 22 in a timely manner, the arm member 444 is controlled to swing greatly, and when the player operates the frame button 22 in a bad timing, the arm member 444 is controlled. It is controlled so that the shaking is reduced. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the player's operation, the player feels that he / she is participating in the performance of the pachinko machine 10, so that the player is prevented from getting bored early. be able to.

  Further, in the shaking effect 2 in the present control example, the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual shaking state of the variable member, and thus is displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual swinging state of the variable member are synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated in a timely manner in accordance with the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to be greatly shaken, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. In the center area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), a comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a figure simulating the frame button 22 are displayed. In the lower right area of the display screen, Is provided with a timing display portion on which an indicator is displayed to increase or decrease in the left-right direction within the predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display unit is displayed to increase or decrease in the horizontal direction based on information obtained by converting the actual swinging state of the arm member 444 into data using an acceleration sensor. Note that the speed of increasing / decreasing movement in the left / right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swinging width of the arm member 444 increases, or the information obtained from the acceleration sensor is corrected and controlled so as to always have a constant speed. Also good.

  The timing at which the indicator is positioned at the center position S (range a) in the predetermined area M is the timing at which the arm member 444 is most efficiently shaken by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. Control is performed so that the arm member 444 does not largely shake as the timing is further away from the center position S (b range → c range). It should be noted that the timing display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during one shaking effect 2.

  In this control example, an effect that the player operates the frame button 22 in a timely manner is used as the swing member effect 2, but an effect shown in FIG. 122 (b) may be used as other effects. 122 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the shaking effect 2, and the arm member 444 in which the player is a variable member (see FIG. 40). It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges | hangs the frame button 22 in order to shake a frame.

  In this other example, a comment urging the player to perform the continuous hitting operation of the frame button 22 and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the central area of the display screen, and the continuous hitting is performed in the right area of the display screen. There is provided a repeated hit number display section for displaying an indicator that moves upward (increases) in accordance with the number of times. In another example shown in the figure, the indicator of the repeated hitting number display portion rises according to the number of hits of the frame button 22 repeatedly. The arm member 444 may be configured to be driven at a timing at which the arm member 444 is greatly shaken as the indicator level of the continuous hitting number display portion is higher (as it is increased).

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example, a rotating body operation table 222f and a dog breed selection table 222g are added to the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 123B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example is added with a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β with respect to the second control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, in the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the fluctuation start flag 223d are not described, but these are stored in the other memory area 223z. It is assumed that it is included, only the description thereof is omitted, and the same processing as in the second control example is performed.

  Next, a combination of figures displayed on the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body operation table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and an error range used when setting the combination of the figures in this control example. Here, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate, the rotation is always transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b by the transmission mechanism (the detailed description is the same as in the first embodiment and is omitted). To do). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355 that is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b is set to 20.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate and the first gear 353 rotates by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a rotates about 25 degrees. The second gear 355 is also rotated by one tooth in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate at different angles based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. In the rotating body operation table shown in the figure, No. Are provided from “1” to “141”. No. shown on the vertical axis. Is attached corresponding to the unit in which the drive motor control means controls, that is, for each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. For example, no. No. 1 shows a state in which the first rotating body 340a rotates 25 degrees and the second rotating body 340b rotates 18 degrees. It is shown as 2. Hereinafter, numbers are assigned in order based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. No. is “141”. It returns to the same state as “1”. That is, when the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are 140 teeth, that is, the first rotating body 340a is 3600 degrees (10 rotations) and the second rotating body 340b is 2520 degrees (7 rotations), It is configured to return to the state.

  Further, the rotating body operation table is provided with a first error range and a second error range. It is shown whether the display mode of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b corresponding to is acceptable as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. In addition, about the mechanism in which an error generate | occur | produces in the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b, and the structure which prevents that an unnatural feeling generate | occur | produces in a display mode by the error is the structure demonstrated in 1st Embodiment mentioned above. Since it is the same as that, its description is omitted.

  The first error range shown in the rotating body operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and the second error range is The error range is wider than the first error range, and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to the player.

  For example, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the state of “48” is “B, B ′”, and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the state “89” is also “B, B ′”, and this display mode is set as the second error range.

  This is No. 1 which is the first error range from the display mode (display information) of the current rotating body acquired in the pre-reading reel display effect process (see FIG. 129) described later. When the rotation amount until moving to “48” is a predetermined amount or more, No. 2 which is the second error range. This is because correction can be performed so as to move to “89”.

  By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time until each rotating body is stopped (the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol) is short, for example, a winning command generated during the fluctuation display of the third symbol is used. Even if it is a fluctuating effect using a rotating body based on a rotating effect based on operating a frame button 22 generated while the 3rd symbol is fluctuating, a predetermined stop display mode is displayed. It becomes possible to make it.

  In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the first embodiment is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are moved in the normal rotation direction (No. ascending order) or the reverse rotation direction ( No. in descending order) and is controlled by drive motor control means provided in the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, each table used in the special effect process and the shaking effect process 2 added in this control example will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog breed selection table used in a special effect process (see FIG. 132) described later.

  This dog breed selection table is based on the points (mission achievement result) acquired while the production mode is set to mode A, and the special production (contact time) executed while the production mode is set to mode C. Is a table for selecting the dog type used in step (1), and is configured to select any of the dog type A to dog type D according to the mission achievement result.

  Dog breed A to dog breed D are set so that the degree of increase in reliability in the production during the contact time (during time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in the reliability is set to “normal”, and the performance for which the reliability can be custom-set is set as “fish reach”. Note that the more the points of the mission achievement result, the higher the production effect is set for the player, and the dog type A is set to be the dog type with the highest production effect.

  Here, the high production effect means that, for example, by increasing the appearance frequency of productions that rarely appear in normal (premier production) or by expanding the range of custom settings for reliability, This means that a production that cannot be experienced in a state can be experienced.

  Next, FIG. 125B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a shaking operation table 2 used in a shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. This shaking motion table 2 acquires the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable status of the variable member (arm member 444) in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when the shaking effect is performed. It is a table which sets the direction which rotates a variable member (arm member 444) based on acceleration sensor information for doing.

  In the shaking motion table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timings are divided into three, “81 to 100”, “51 to 80”, and “0 to 50”. This section corresponds to each of the indicators “a”, “b”, and “c” displayed in FIG. 122A. For example, the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is in a circle (center position S). In the case of (b), the direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated is set with reference to the table of “81 to 100” corresponding to the button operation timing “a”.

  Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the swing motion table 2 in FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the variable member. For example, the acceleration sensor When the information acquired from (2) indicates a situation where the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

  Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set with reference to the table corresponding to the button operation timing and acceleration sensor information described above. In this control example, when the button operation timing is “81 to 100”, data for driving the drive motor is set in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member is increased, and when the button operation timing is “51 to 80”. The data for driving the drive motor is not set to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. Furthermore, when the button operation timing is “0 to 50”, data for driving the drive motor in a direction in which the rotation width of the variable member is reduced is set.

  In this control example, data for driving the drive motor is not set in order to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. However, data for driving the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is not set. It may be set.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 133, the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example is different from each control example described above in that a part of the command determination process, the volume setting process, and the shake control process is changed, and a special effect process is newly added. The parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the details of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main process. In the main process, first, the processes from S1301 to S1310 are executed as in the second control example. Next, a command determination process 2 for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1351). Details of the command determination process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed similarly to the above-described second control example, and then the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Next, the shake control process 2 (S1354) executed during the shake effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is executed. Details of the shaking control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  And the other process (S1355) described in the 1st control example or the 2nd control example mentioned above is performed, and the process from S1317 to S1321 is performed similarly to the 2nd control example mentioned above. In S1355, a synchronous effect management process (S1313), a left / right selection process (S1315), and a reel control process (S1330) are executed.

  Next, the details of the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1351). In this command determination process 2 (S1351), a winning effect changing process (S1451) that is performed when a special symbol winning command is received is added to the command determination process (S1311) in the second control example described above. The other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process 2, first, the processes from S1401 to S1410 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 88) described above. Next, when it is determined in S1410 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), processing corresponding to other commands (S1412) is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the special symbol winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area (S1411), and the effect changing process at winning is performed. (S1451) is executed. This winning effect changing process (S1451) is a process of changing the effect based on the winning command when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110. FIG. Will be described later. Then, after performing the winning effect changing process (S1451), the process proceeds to S1412.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main controller 110, an effect based on information included in the winning command (so-called pre-reading effect) can be realized. It is described as follows. As a result, by changing the presentation at a timing other than the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, it becomes possible to execute various presentations, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to get bored by the player There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the winning effect changing process (S1451) performed in the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the winning effect changing process (S1451). In the winning effect changing process (S1451), processing related to the effect (so-called pre-reading effect) executed based on the information included in the received winning command is executed.

  In the winning effect changing process, firstly, winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the prefetch effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetch effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403).

  The chance eye display effect is an effect that is executed based on the determination result of the winning command received this time, and the third symbol that is executed until the third symbol variation based on the winning command received this time is started. In the variation, the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed is a specific combination determined in advance other than the combination that is a jackpot, which is an effect that suggests the possibility that a jackpot exists in the determination result of the reserved symbols.

  If it is determined in S4403 that the pre-reading effect is not a chance eye display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403: Yes), it is then determined whether the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404).

  If it is determined that the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404: Yes), a stop type command for display in which the stop symbol is a chance is set (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4408.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the third symbol is not changing at high speed (S4404: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405). When the remaining change time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the third symbol is more than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), a reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining variation time (S4406), and a setting start flag is set. Set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S4408.

  As described above, in the chance eye display effect in the present control example, the mode of displaying the chance eye can be varied according to the timing at which the winning command including the information for executing the chance target effect is received. That is, if the timing at which the winning command is received is variably displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 3rd symbol is changing at high speed, a process of changing the change stop symbol to the chance is executed. However, since there is no sense of incongruity to the player, a display stop type command is set in which the stop symbol of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes a chance. On the other hand, when the timing of receiving the winning command is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the third symbol is not changing at high speed (for example, at least one of a plurality of symbol strings is stopped and displayed. The reel member (the first rotating body 340a of the first rotating body 340a) provided in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 at a low timing or at least one of a plurality of symbol rows. The third symbol display device 81 displays a composite of the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and displays a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body. Control is performed to display the chance eye by raising the position (exposure position) covering the third symbol displayed on the screen.

  With this configuration, even if a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received at the timing when the third symbol is stopped or displayed at a low speed on the display screen, the player feels uncomfortable. The chance eyes can be displayed without. Therefore, when a winning command including information on the chance eye display effect is received, the stop display of the changing 3rd symbol can be changed to the chance, and the 3rd symbol changing without giving the player a sense of incongruity. There is an effect that the period during which the stop display can be changed to the chance display can be extended.

  In this control example, the remaining variation time of the third symbol is determined in S4405. This is because, in the normal gaming state, the reel member housed in the housing position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is driven to the exposed position that covers the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 by driving the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300. If the time required to raise the reel member to the exposed position is shortened, the remaining fluctuation time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

  Further, in this control example, the reel members stored in the storage position are reel-controlled so that the display mode combined and displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof is the display mode corresponding to the chance pattern of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member is finished and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the reel control described above is executed. It should be noted that when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are positioned at the origin position (initial position), the display mode displayed on the display surface may be configured to be a display mode corresponding to the chance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide reel control that makes the display mode of the reel member a chance, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. Next, a pre-read reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the pre-reading reel display effect is a pre-reading reel in order to reliably display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the pre-reading reel display effect within the variation time. This is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member until the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the display effect information is started. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the pre-read reel display effect process (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-read effect is a special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period during which a special volume setting different from the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) is possible, and when the volume is set by the special volume setting. This is an effect in which the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the expected value of the jackpot of the special symbol being changed or the expected value of the jackpot in the reserved symbol is notified using a special voice, volume or display mode.

  If it is not determined in S4409 that the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting (S4409: Yes), a display stop type command is set in which the blank symbol (sub-symbol) is changed to the volume symbol (S4410). Then, the sound volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

  Next, other processing relating to the prefetch effect is executed (S4412). Here, as other processing, for example, there is processing for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on information included in the winning command. After executing the other prefetch processing of S4412, this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device, a pre-reading effect is executed based on information included in the winning command. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that suggests the result of the determination based on the prize between the time the ball is won at the prize opening and the special symbol corresponding to the prize starts to change. Thus, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the pre-read reel display effect process (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing pre-read reel display effect processing (S4408). This pre-read reel display effect process (S4408) is a process related to the pre-read effect performed during the above-described winning effect changing process (S1451).

  When the pre-read reel display effect process is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (sub-third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and pre-read stop display information (sub-third symbol based on the winning command) are displayed. Stop display information) is acquired (S4501). The sub third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by combining and displaying symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Further, the rotation of the first rotator 340 a and the second rotator 340 b is controlled by the drive of the drive motor 350.

  Therefore, the present display information can be acquired by detecting the rotational drive status of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (number of pulses) for rotationally driving the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, is detected, and a location corresponding to the current number of steps is acquired as current display information from the rotating body operation table.

  The acquisition of the pre-reading stop display information is to determine the stop display symbol of the sub third symbol based on the winning command from the information included in the winning command, and the stop display symbol is first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range. Information is acquired.

  Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the prefetch stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. corresponding to the current display information. And No. corresponding to the pre-read stop display information. And the difference is calculated. In this control example, since the drive motor 350 is configured to be capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the difference to be calculated is that when the drive motor 350 is rotated forward (the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. increases). ) And when the drive motor 350 is reversed (when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases), the rotation amount with the smaller difference is calculated.

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the rotation amount calculated by S4502 is a rotation amount which rotates a 1st rotary body more than 1080 degree | times (S4503). Here, the rotation amount of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it takes about 1 second for the first rotating body to make one round. That is, in S4503, the current display information corresponds to No. No. corresponding to the pre-read stop display information. It is determined whether the number of seconds required to move (rotate) to 3 is 3 seconds or more.

  When it is determined in the process of S4503 that the rotation amount is a rotation amount that is rotated more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), No. corresponding to the stop display information. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. However, No. corresponding to the stop display information in the first error range. No. which needs to be rotated more than 1080 degrees in order to rotate up to In this case, the stop display information corresponding to the stop display information within the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less No. corresponding to the stop display information in the process of S4506. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range, the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4503 that the rotation amount is 1080 degrees or less, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, this process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. In the reel scenario table, a table that is referred to in an effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variation pattern selection process) executed when a change pattern command is received ) Are separately provided.

  In S4504, the reel scenario table corresponding to the prefetch control process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, either the position (exposed position) where the player can visually recognize the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b or the position (storage position) where the player cannot visually recognize the reel member. The reel position at which it is determined to be positioned, the rotation speed of the reel member, the presence / absence of pre-rotation, and the presence / absence of a notification effect that informs the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared, and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on the information included in the winning command, the rotational operation amount, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Note that the pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table is a No. corresponding to the current display information. No. corresponding to the stop display information. The winning command includes pre-reading information (pre-reading reel display effect information) as well as the special symbol variation display corresponding to the winning command including pre-reading information (pre-reading reel display effect information). No. corresponding to the current display information is also displayed while other variation display (preliminary variation display) executed until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to is started. No. corresponding to the stop display information. This is a control to turn the reel symbol in advance toward.

  This pre-rotation control is based on a pattern in which the amount of rotation operation is rotated by making the amount of rotation operation uniform for each variable display based on the number of pre-variable displays (or the number of reserved symbols), and the amount of rotation operation. There is a pattern of rotating at once up to the pre-rotation operation amount set based on this, and these are set based on the value acquired from the effect counter and the variation time of each variation display.

  By using such a configuration, even if the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the pre-read information (information on the pre-read reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the variable display ( The number of rotations) can be reduced in advance, and a pre-read reel display effect can be provided to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  When performing the above-mentioned pre-rotation, the pre-rotation is performed with the effect that the reel is raised to the exposure position and pre-rotation, and the reel is lowered again to the storage position, and the reel is positioned at the storage position. It is advisable to provide both production patterns for performing

  By configuring in this way, in the former production pattern, by performing preliminary rotation at the exposure position, the player is informed that the pre-read reel display production is being performed, while expecting the player In the latter production pattern, which allows games to be performed, it is possible to execute the contents of the pre-rotation without notice to the player by performing the pre-rotation at the storage position. (Stop display at No. corresponding to the stop display information) can be quickly displayed.

  In addition, the notification effect for notifying the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed is an effect of swinging and driving the container 300 as a reel member at the storage position, and a plurality of values are obtained based on values acquired from the effect counter. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

  Note that a gaming state and a gaming result may be added as a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to complicate the effect pattern, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as one round of about 1 second, in practice, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low-speed rotation, medium-speed rotation, High speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the processing of S4503, the stop display information corresponding to the stop display information based on the rotation speed when the low-speed rotation is performed. Is provided with a correction boundary value (1080 degrees) for correcting from the first error range to the second error range.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to stop display the stop display information to the player no matter what rotation speed is set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the prefetch stop display information is larger than a predetermined amount. The stop display symbol is displayed No. However, the stop display symbol may be set from the first error range or the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the pre-reading reel display effect as the pre-reading effect is started, or until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. Based on the time, whether to obtain the stop display symbol from the first error range or from the second error range may be set. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to display stop display information to the player more reliably.

  In this control example, this process is configured as an effect process based on the receipt of a winning command (so-called prefetch effect process). For example, an effect process based on the reception of a variation pattern command This processing may be used as By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine which error range the stop display symbol is set based on the variation time of the variation, and there is a problem that the stop display is not in time within the variation time. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Moreover, you may use for the production | presentation performed based on the player operating the frame button 22 besides that. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs a variable display of the 3rd symbol, and the player operates the frame button 22. An effect is possible in which the variation display of the third symbol is changed to a mode using a reel member.

  Even when such an effect is executed, the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is changed to that of the third symbol using the reel member during the variation display of the special symbol. When the effect of switching to the variable display is used, as shown in this control example, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member can be set from the first error range and the second error range. If there is a margin in the symbol remaining time, it can be set from within the first error range, and if there is no margin in the variation time, it can be set from the second error range. It is possible to suppress such problems as not being present, and by providing the second error range, the display mode of the third symbol can be changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member even when the remaining time of variation of the special symbol is reduced. For To change to the display was able to allow.

  In this control example, the symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol (rotary symbol) synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are respectively displayed. Although it is used as 3 symbols, for example, only a liquid crystal design may be a 3rd design with a rotating design as an effect design for production (designs that do not directly correspond to the variation display of special symbols), or a liquid crystal design. May be used as the production symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. In addition, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotating symbol during one fluctuation display. By constituting in this way, it becomes possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

  Next, the details of the sound volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process 2 (S1352). This volume setting process 2 (S1352) is different from the above-described volume setting process (S1314) in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be on is added, and the other parts are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the volume setting period flag 223α is ON (S4601). When it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not on (S4601: No), the above-described volume setting process (S1314) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), it is then determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set to on (S4602). If the special volume setting flag 223β is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether or not the volume symbol has been selected by the player (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that no volume symbol has been selected (S4603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume symbol is selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). . Next, special volume setting period management processing (S4606) is executed.

  When the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the volume level controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 is switched from the volume level in the normal game to the special volume level during the special volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect is finished and the normal game is returned, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, the troublesome operation that the player again sets the volume of the pachinko machine 10 to the volume level suitable for the normal game can be eliminated.

  Returning to the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is on (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). If it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has been pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is raised and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and a display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has not been pressed (S4607: No), it is then determined whether the lower selection switch 291b has been pressed (S4610).

  If it is determined in step S4610 that the lower selection switch 291b has not been pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to a special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and the special volume level is displayed. Command is set (S4612). Next, special volume setting period management processing (S4606) is executed.

  The special volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process for managing a period during which the special volume is set, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S4606 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, details of the special sound volume setting period management process (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management process (S4606).

  In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether or not the volume setting period flag 223α is OFF (S4701). If it is determined that the sound volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4701: No), it is then determined whether a stop command corresponding to the winning information in which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is made by receiving a stop command set in S300 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed by main controller 110.

  In this control example, identification information that can be associated is given to the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device, and the winning command is indicated by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 based on the identification information. The winning information and the stop command are configured to be associated with each other, but other configurations may be used. For example, an area storing prize information including information on special volume setting effects is stored in the prize information storage area, and the area storing prize information including information on special volume setting effects is shifted to the execution area. You may make it the structure which manages this.

  Returning to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set in the process of S4702 (not received yet) (S4702: No), this process ends because it is still the volume setting period. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a stop command corresponding to the winning information set with the special volume setting effect (received), the special volume level is cleared (S4703), and the display command for deleting the display of the special volume setting screen is displayed. Is set (S4704). Next, the sound volume setting period flag 223α is set to OFF (S4705), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level as the special volume level. Has been. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect is ended and the normal game is returned, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect is started (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area). It becomes possible to return to preparation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the details of the special effect process (S1353) that is performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect process (S1353).

  In the special effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). If it is determined that the current effect mode is not mode A (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is mode A (S4801: Yes), it is then determined whether a mini game is being played (S4802). Here, the mini game refers to the game effect shown in FIG. 120A in which the player acquires points by operating the operation means (the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, and the selection switch 291).

  If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the mini game is not being played (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the mini game (S4802: Yes), points according to the result of the mini game are added to the earned point storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the earned points is set (S4804). ). Then, the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, it is determined whether the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect in which points can be obtained by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). In the process of S4805, when it is determined that it is not a specific effect (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a specific effect (S4805: Yes), points according to the specific effect are added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

  As described above, the special effect process when the effect mode is mode A is a process of adding points acquired by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect. Note that another method may be used as a method by which the player can acquire points during the production mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured such that a predetermined password can be input, and points may be added when the player inputs the predetermined password, or the game result (the number of jackpots or the number of winnings) You may comprise so that a point may be added based on a ball.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing in the case where the effect mode is mode A (S4802 to S4807) is executed, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is mode B (S4808). If it is determined that the effect mode is not mode B (S4808: No), the process proceeds to S4811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the production mode is mode B (S4808: Yes), the dog type is then selected from the dog type selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating the breed is set (S4810), and the process proceeds to S4811.

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is mode B, a process of selecting a dog type used in mode C to be described later is performed based on the points acquired during mode A. In this control example, by selecting a specific dog type from a plurality of types of dog types, the contents of the settings performed during mode C (the production reliability and the production type for setting the reliability) are changed. Although it is configured as described above, it may be configured so that the player can select the type of setting and the degree of increase in reliability performed during mode C based on the points acquired during mode A during mode B. Good. When configured in this way, it is preferable to increase the range that can be selected by the player as the number of points acquired during mode A increases. By doing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to positively acquire points, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the process (S4809 to S4810) when the effect mode is mode B is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not mode C (S4811: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is C (S4811: Yes), an effect corresponding to the dog type set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-described special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, with respect to the second control example described above, an effect (special effect) in which the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is mode C can be changed (custom setting). About, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the type of production subject to custom setting and the degree of increase in reliability of the production based on the points acquired when the production mode is mode A. Even when the player is staying in the effect mode, the player can always participate in the game effect, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the details of the shake control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the shake control process 2 (S1354).

  In the shake control process 2, it is first determined whether or not the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). If it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operating flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), it is then determined whether the variation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902).

  If it is determined in step S4902 that the variation pattern is not a shaking effect (S4902: No), other shaking control processing (S4911) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Note that the other shake control process executed in S4911 is the shake control process (S1316) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S49028 that the variation pattern is a shaking effect (S4902: Yes), initial operation data for driving the arm member 444 (movable accessory) in a predetermined manner is set ( In step S4903, the operating flag is set to ON (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided in the movable accessory is read, and the swing information of the movable accessory is acquired (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator based on the information of the acceleration sensor is set (S4906). The indicator corresponding to the display command set here is an indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG.

  When the processing of S4906 is executed, it is next determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the swing motion data is obtained from the swing motion table (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor. Set. And it is discriminate | determined whether the shaking production was complete | finished (S4909).

  If it is determined that the shaking effect has not ended (S4909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the shaking effect has ended (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. After setting (S4910), this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the swing control process 2 in this control example, the operation state of the movable accessory is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable accessory) and is operated by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operation means) and the operation status of the movable accessory, the movable accessory is moved in a direction in which it is greatly shaken (movable direction), or the movable accessory is shaken in a small direction (movable) Since the swing motion (movable motion) table 2 is used to set whether the movable member is movable in the direction), the variable member is actually controlled to move based on the player's operation. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to actively operate the operation means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, in this control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for informing the timing at which the player operates the operation means based on the operation state of the movable accessory acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is configured to be able to display on the display screen, the player can cause the movable accessory to perform a desired movable operation by operating the operation means while viewing the operation timing notification display.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (the bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed, The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command and the game state command, the back image and the super reach reach can be changed according to the game state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning to be notified to the sound lamp controller 113 as the number of reserved balls. Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Information on various counters (first random number counter C1 and first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is an audio lamp. You may notify to the control apparatus 113. FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first winning port 64 on which a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters the game board 13 is provided, but this is not necessarily the case. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the pass through the through gate 66 or 67 are configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on winning in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of reserved balls or in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In addition, in this control example, it is possible to set a normal gaming state in which the special jackpot probability is low probability and a probability variation gaming state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is high as the gaming state, and the normal symbol is more likely to hit. Although the pachinko machine which can set the short time state which is a game state and the normal state where a normal symbol is hard to hit than the short state is used, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine having other game states. For example, when the special symbol jackpot probability is in the probability variation state, acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is advantageous to the player even if the result of determining whether the special symbol is wrong or not. You may enable it to set the 2nd probability change game state in which a state (what is called a small hit) is set with a probability higher than usual. Note that “small winning” is a state in which a ball can be won in the variable winning device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is not satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, the player who has entered the probability variation game state will be aiming for the second probability variation game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and will get bored early in the game. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the case where the second probability variation gaming state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of determinations of whether or not the special symbol is executed during the probability variation gaming state. May be configured to shift from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state. With this configuration, the probability variation gaming state will not continue until the next big hit if it becomes the probability variation gaming state as in the past, so even in the probability variation gaming state, it is concentrated on the player A game can be performed.

  As described above, when the second probability variation gaming state is set in the pachinko machine or the like in which the number of times of determination of success / failure is set for the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, the player obtains more balls in the second probability variation gaming state. You will be aware of jackpots and jackpots. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a concentrated manner, and to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Furthermore, when using a gaming machine that can set the second probability variation gaming state, it is preferable to provide a plurality of third symbol display devices and switch the device that displays the variation of the third symbol according to the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to inform the surrounding players that the game is being played in the most advantageous game state for the player, such as the second probability variation game state, and to give the player a sense of satisfaction. Can be provided.

  Note that as the plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in this control example and the reel members (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body provided in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300). A member that synthesizes and displays the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface of 340b and rotates and displays each of the plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body may be used. With this configuration, the variation display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the difference in appearance can be clarified.

  In addition, the lifting / lowering control of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 moves the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 to an exposed position (a position covering at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) visible to the player, Since it can be moved to a storage position that is difficult to visually recognize (a position stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the variation display of the third symbol in the second probability variation gaming state is reeled. By being configured to be performed by a member, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 is playing the game in the second probability variation gaming state only by being positioned at the exposed position, and the player is satisfied A feeling can be provided.

  Furthermore, as the raising / lowering control of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 performs an operation of moving back and forth between the storage position and the exposure position, thereby providing an effect that suggests the current gaming state to the player. Since it can be performed, it is possible to provide an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the second probability variation gaming state, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays a variable display that suggests whether or not the special symbol success / failure determination result is a big hit, and the reel member has a special symbol success / failure determination result that is a small hit. It is also possible to execute a variable display that suggests whether or not. By configuring in this way, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member on which a variable display indicating whether or not a small hit is made in the first half period of the second probability variation gaming state, and the second half of the second probability variation gaming state. When the period comes, attention is paid to the third symbol display device 81 on which a variable display suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

  Using a different display device, a variable display that indicates whether or not the special symbol's success / failure determination result is a big hit and a special symbol that shows whether or not the special symbol's success / failure determination result is a small hit When displaying simultaneously, either one should be displayed as a 3rd design and the other should be displayed as a decoration design. In addition, an effect that suggests the result of the success / failure determination may be performed by a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, instead of a symbol display, or an effect using only sound and lamps. Furthermore, the display device that is variably displayed based on the determination result of the special symbol may be switched.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of Invention Taking Left / Right Sensor Device 600 as an Example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate arranged on the front side of the game board with a space through which game media can pass, and a displacement on the back side of the game board A displacement member that can be arranged and made visible to the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. In the gaming machine, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable up to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device.

  Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light toward the front of a game board (a plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from an object is provided, and the optical sensor allows the player to A device that detects the presence or movement of a finger is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). In this case, the path of the light (irradiation light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap the movement region of the displacement member formed so as to be displaceable (for example, paragraph 0045 of JP 2010-094348 A). And FIG. 5). Therefore, there is a problem that the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and the displacement member cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable up to a position that overlaps at least a part of the detection region of the sensor device, so that the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection region of the sensor device. Can do. In other words, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

  The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, for example, an optical sensor device (an irradiation unit that emits light composed of visible light or invisible light, and an object (object) irradiated from the irradiation unit. And a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light beam and evaluating the received light). As a method for evaluating the received light, a triangulation method that converts the imaging position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence / absence (distance) of an object, or the time required to receive light after irradiation A time-of-flight method for converting the value into the presence / absence (distance) of an object is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined interval from each other, and the displacement member includes a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A gaming machine A2 that can be displaced to a position that divides the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. These two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation for causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

  On the other hand, by evacuating the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, it is possible to release the division of the two detection areas by the displacement member. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is displaceable in an area overlapping at least one of the detection area of the first sensor or the detection area of the second sensor, and the first sensor is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection areas of the second sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor or the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of the detection area of at least one of the detection area of the first sensor or the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his / her hand or finger, the player can search for the detection area.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can serve as both the means for detecting the object on the front surface side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and there is no need to separately provide a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. . Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, it is possible to reduce the component cost.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4 includes a light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light, and the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided, it is possible to produce an effect by light emission of the light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to suppress erroneous detection of the sensor device. In addition, since the member for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device can also be used as the displacement member, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielding position, and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member receives light emitted from the light emitting means according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means that emits light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means, Can be suppressed from being received. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light incident on the sensor device from light emission of any of the light emitting means is provided, a large space is required for the arrangement of such members. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A5 or A6 includes a second displacing member disposed on the back side of the gaming board so as to be displaceable, visible through an opening of the gaming board, and disposed with the light emitting means. According to a displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can shield light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is disposed on the second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, it is possible to produce an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at different positions in accordance with the displacement of the second displacement member. . In this case, according to the displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. Can be suppressed from being received. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is provided for the arrangement of the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor. A gaming machine A8, wherein the other one of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light reflected by dirt on the transparent plate.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes the first sensor and the second sensor that are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the first sensor or the second sensor Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor or the second sensor can receive light, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. On the other hand, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, oil on the player's hand).

  For example, in the configuration in which one sensor device is disposed at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated obliquely to the transparent plate, the sensor device in front view Can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and an object (for example, a player's hand or finger) existing on the front side of the transparent plate can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening, with the opening of the gaming board interposed therebetween, for example. It can be difficult for the player to see. In this case, when the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor is reflected by dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor, and the transparent plate is stained. When there is no light, the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor. Thereby, the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate can be detected.

  In addition, it is preferable to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate by the first sensor and the second sensor in the process when the gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, there is no need to distinguish between an object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and dirt on the transparent plate because the player has not entered the store. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is characterized in that an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light is disposed on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Therefore, it can be avoided that the light reflected by the displacement member is received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the emitted light at a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the light emitted from the portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. The light reflected by the displacement member can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

  Further, since the portion of the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to an object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Thereby, a displacement member can be displaced, ensuring the detection area | region of a sensor apparatus.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is formed with a reflective surface that reflects the emitted light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is a reflection that reflects the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, it can be avoided that the light reflected by the displacement member is received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the central floating unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable; a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable with the displacement member; and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member. A gaming machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members displaceable independently of each other, and the first member being connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Here, a displaceable displacement member is provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. In addition, there is a type in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member, and the first member is rotated to enhance the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above, there is a problem that the first member rotates while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the change in the movement of the first member is poor.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member includes a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Moreover, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be capable of relative displacement, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member, and both are displaced by independent displacement, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. And as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  In addition, as a form of displacement of the arm member, for example, a form in which the other end is rotated, a form in which the other end is slid, a combination of these (one of the arm members is rotated, and the other is slid , Forms to be employed respectively).

  Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, the shaft disposed on one of the arm member or the first member is pivoted on the shaft hole disposed on the other. A configuration in which the supported shaft is rotatable relative to the shaft hole so as to be relatively displaceable, and a pin disposed on one of the arm member or the first member slides along a sliding groove disposed on the other A configuration in which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member, and the elastic member is elastically deformed so that the relative displacement can be performed, arranged on one of the arm member and the first member. The spherical member arranged on the other side is rotated in an arbitrary direction with respect to the stud that is in spherical contact with the ball, and the arm member and the first member have one or a plurality of link mechanisms (not deformed). Seki is a moving part Form that allows relative displacement by coupled linkage via a connected system) is deformed, and the form of a combination of each of these embodiments are illustrated by.

  In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and by a driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine B2 that is rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, each one end of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that combines linear motion and rotational motion, and to change the motion.

  Note that the distance from one end to the other end of the pair of arm members may be set to the same length, or may be set to different lengths.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a slide groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the slide groove. A pin portion to be formed is disposed, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and at least the arm member is at the reference position. In the disposed state, a gap is formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin part, so even if the arm member is stopped, the first member It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, an inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. Thus, a reciprocating displacement can be formed. As a result, the first member can be reciprocated (swayed) after stopping the displacement of the arm member.

  In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the arm member is reduced. When the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member after being stopped at the reference position, the gap between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion is A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape, so that after the reciprocation of the first member converges and stops, The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it can suppress that the 1st member evacuated to the evacuation position rattles by disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and by a driving force applied from the driving means. Rotating about the other end, the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed in the first member. Game machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, each one end of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that combines linear motion and rotational motion, and to change the motion.

  In this case, since the sliding groove is formed linearly and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove according to the rotation angle of the arm member ( (Inclination direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially C shape or in a straight line. Thereby, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of the inertial force, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape. The reciprocating motion can be quickly converged toward the center of the letter C while enabling the rotation component to be added to the movement, and when the sliding groove is arranged in a straight line, The movement can be only a linear component.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, a gap formed between one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion allows movement of the first member by the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7, which is arranged in a direction to play.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion is the first member by the action of gravity. Since the movement of the first member is arranged, in addition to the movement driven by the displacement of the arm member, the movement of the first member can be formed by the action of gravity without being moved by the movement of the arm member. . Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is coupled, a driven portion that is displaceably disposed on the main body portion, and a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine B8, comprising: second driving means for applying a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body part to which one end of the arm member is coupled, a driven part that is displaceably disposed on the main body part, Since the second driving means for applying a driving force to the driven part is provided, it is possible to produce an effect of relatively displacing the driven part with respect to the main body part by the driving force of the second driving means. In this case, since the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, the reaction force can form a displacement that reciprocates the pin portion toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. it can. As a result, the main body (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) in a state where the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means. In the state where the displacement of the member is stopped, when a reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body portion to displace the main body portion, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the main body portion.

  Examples of the shape of the driven part include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and a long shape. In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the driven part may be decentered from the center of rotation (position supported by the main body part). Thereby, the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit can be increased, and the variation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body unit.

  In the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is positioned between the pair of pin parts.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is located between the pair of pin parts, so that the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving part is reduced by the rotation of the main body part. It can be easily connected to movement.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10 includes a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B10, the second displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member. With this contact, both the movement of the first member and the change of the movement of the first member can be achieved. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member is displaced (reciprocated) by the inertial force generated when the arm member is stopped by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the first member. This can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, when the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member and the first member is bounced off, so that the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced or a mode in which the first member is displaced in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member.

  Further, when the first member includes the main body and the driven part, the second displacement member is kept in contact with the main body so that only the driven part is displaced while maintaining the main body in a stopped state. Can be made. That is, it is possible to form an aspect in which the main body part is displaced together with the driven part by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven part and an aspect in which only the driven part is displaced.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11 includes a second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and a magnet is disposed on one of the first member or the second displacement member, and the first member or the first member A magnet or an iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A gaming machine B12 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the gaming machine B12 includes the second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force acts between the magnet and the magnet or iron member disposed on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the movement of the first member is regulated by the action of the magnetic force, or The first member can be displaced. For example, after the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of magnetic force by moving the second displacement member close to and away from the first member. In addition, since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other.

<About the concept of the invention using the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In the gaming machine that allows the player to visually recognize the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is configured so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to be different from each other.

  Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer circumferential surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to be drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotating body is driven to rotate independently by the first driving motor (driving means), and the second rotating body is driven to rotate independently by the second driving motor, and the figure of the first rotating body visually recognized by the player. And the combination of the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the same number of drive motors as that of the rotating body are required, which increases the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means applies the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body is different from the rotating state of the second rotating body. Therefore, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed even with one driving means. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, as a different rotation state of one rotating body and the other rotating body, for example, a state in which the rotating speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated while the other rotating body is rotated. A state in which the rotating body is stopped is exemplified. The rotational speed need not be constant, and may be increased or decreased.

  Moreover, as a some figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotary body, a character, a design, a color, a pattern, or these combinations are illustrated, for example. In this case, the graphic may be a part of a character or design (one that combines with another graphic to form one character or design), or all (only the graphic forms one character or design). Stuff).

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. A rotation period and the rotation period of a 2nd rotary body can be varied. Therefore, even if it is one drive means, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body and the figure of the 2nd rotary body which a player visually recognizes can be changed.

  Moreover, since the transmission means is configured to vary the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the structure of the transmitting means can be simplified.

  Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism (gear transmission mechanism and chain transmission mechanism) that transmits rotation by meshing and a mechanism (friction transmission mechanism and belt transmission mechanism) that transmits rotation by friction. The gear transmission mechanism is a spur gear, worm and worm gear, bevel gear, or rack and pinion, the chain transmission mechanism is a chain and sprocket, the friction transmission mechanism is a friction gear, and the belt transmission mechanism is A pulley and a belt are illustrated respectively.

  In this case, the mechanism for transmitting the rotation with the above-described meshing between the rotation shaft of the first rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means and between the rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has its rotating shaft directly connected to the driving shaft of the driving means, and the first rotating body and A mechanism for transmitting rotation by meshing or a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be disposed between the other rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means. In the latter case, the number of parts (gears, etc.) for constituting a mechanism for transmitting rotation can be suppressed, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C2, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are in a state in which the other phase is shifted with respect to one phase at a visual recognition position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visible to the player. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by being stopped at

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the number of graphic combinations that can be displayed can be increased, and it is necessary to display a desired graphic combination. The number of rotations can be suppressed, and it can appear in a short time.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at a visual recognition position where the player can visually recognize the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface, the two rotating bodies are requested to have the same phase. As the number of possible figures decreases, the number of revolutions required to reveal the desired combination of figures increases (the table lengthens). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, the other phase is shifted from the one phase of both rotating bodies. Therefore, the number of combinations of figures that can be displayed can be increased, and the number of rotations required to display a desired combination of figures can be suppressed and the number of combinations can be displayed in a short time. it can.

  In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are curved in a circular arc shape protruding outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferred. Thereby, even when there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body stopped at the visual recognition position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means includes first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. And at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. And a non-engagement region that blocks transmission of rotation with non-engagement between the meshing region that transmits rotation and the other gear.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and the second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation and the other gear. A non-engagement region that interrupts transmission of rotation with non-engagement with the gear, so that one of the first and second rotating bodies is stopped while the other is rotated, and the first rotation A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even if it is one drive means, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body and the figure of the 2nd rotary body which a player visually recognizes can be changed.

  Further, in this way, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, stop one of the rotations, release the stop, and restart the rotation. The expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body can be enhanced.

  Both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region and a non-meshing region. May be provided. Thereby, it is possible to form a state where both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state where both stop, a state where one stops and the other rotates, and a state where one rotates and the other stops. .

  In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission unit or the second transmission unit includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is the first rotating body or A gaming machine C5, which is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes the gear having the meshing area and the non-meshing area, so that the driving means is driven. In this state, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, and the other is maintained in rotation. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region is set corresponding to the interval between the figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. The length of the table whose element is a combination with the figure of the second rotating body can be shortened. Therefore, the number of rotations of the first rotator and the second rotator required to reveal a desired combination of figures can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required for making a desired figure combination appear.

  In addition, the formation range of the non-engagement region is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface. One of the first rotation body and the second rotation body is determined by the non-engagement region. This means that the other is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1) while stopped. In particular, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because it is possible to minimize the number of revolutions necessary for making the desired table combination appear by minimizing the length of the table.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission means transmits a rotation in the positive direction of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a positive direction of the driving means. A reverse direction transmission means for transmitting rotation in the opposite direction opposite to the first rotation body and the second rotation body, and when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the forward rotation of the drive means The transmission to the direction transmission means is allowed, the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is interrupted, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation of the drive means is transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. A gaming machine C6 comprising switching means for blocking and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction in the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the switching means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the forward direction transmitting means. When the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is permitted and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means is blocked by the switching means. In addition, since transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is allowed, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation that the player visually recognizes when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction and when rotated in the reverse direction. Different types of combinations with body figures. In other words, two types of tables having the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements and changing to the rotation direction of the driving means can arbitrarily select these two types of tables. can do.

  As the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure described in the gaming machine C2 or C3 (structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different), the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-engagement region), and the first structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. Any one of the three structures can be selected.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission unit and the reverse direction transmission unit. For example, when the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the case where the second structure is selected is exemplified. In the former case, the rotation ratio is different between the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means. In the latter case, the meshing area and the non-meshing area are different between the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means. The formation ratio of is different. Even in this case, two types of tables having the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements are selected, and the two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected by changing the rotation direction of the driving means. Can be possible.

  Further, the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means are rotated in the reverse direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, the same direction is preferable. This is because it can be made difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the direction of rotation of the driving means.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine includes light emitting means disposed in at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and an outer periphery of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine C7, wherein at least a part of the surface is formed of a light-transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since at least part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light transmissive material, the first The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed in at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means may be always emitted or may be emitted under a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, when the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body form a specific combination, when one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped, the stop For example, when rotation is resumed before or after stopping.

  In the gaming machine C7, the outer surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated through the open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine C8, comprising a container that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the board.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the first rotation is formed through the open portion of the front surface, and the first rotation body and the second rotation body are accommodated while the front surface is formed in an open box shape. Since the player is provided with a container that allows the player to visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means in a different manner from the case where the light emitted from the light emitting means is directly visually recognized. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the inner wall surface of the container and visually recognized by the player, or the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall portion of the container to irradiate a predetermined object. Examples include a mode in which a player visually recognizes a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the wall portion of the container, and a predetermined part (for example, an end surface of the front surface) of the container is emitted. The

  In addition, each said aspect, for example, the specific figure of the several figures drawn in at least one of the 1st rotary body or the 2nd rotary body is the back side (namely, the 1st rotary body or the 2nd rotary body). It is preferably executed when the player is placed at a position that is not visible to the player. A specific figure arranged at a position invisible to the player is associated with the player as the light emitting means emits light (the first rotary body or the second rotary body is placed so that the specific figure is visible). This is because it can be expected to be rotated). In particular, the light emission of the light emitting means is preferably executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C8, a storage body in which the first rotary body and the second rotary body are stored, an effect position and a game in which the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be visually recognized by the player. And a moving means for moving between a retreat position that cannot be visually recognized by a person.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the container in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are players. Since the moving means for moving between the effect position visible from the player and the retreat position not visible from the player is provided, a desired combination of the combination of the first rotary figure and the second rotary figure is selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the required timing.

  That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body relatively much in order to bring out a desired combination, and the time is increased. However, the moving means causes the first rotating body and the second rotating body to rotate. Since the body can be moved from the player to a retreat position that cannot be visually recognized, the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotational position at the retreat position. When the required timing arrives, the moving means can move the first rotating body and the second rotating body to the effect position, and a desired combination can be quickly displayed.

  The gaming machine C9 is provided with operating means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the operating means is operated at the retracted position. Characteristic gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated when they are arranged at the retracted position and the operating means is operated. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance at the retracted position, the player can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the first rotating body and the player cannot be visually recognized by being moved to the retracted position, There is a possibility that the player may recognize the rotation by the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, since the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be performed by being mixed into the operation of the operating means, it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. it can.

  Examples of the operation means include a payout device and a sound generation device. That is, in a state where the game medium is paid out by the payout device, a relatively loud sound is generated with the game medium payout operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like. The same applies to the state where sound is generated from the sound generator. Alternatively, or in addition thereto, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated when a predetermined display is performed on the display device. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like.

<About the concept of the invention taking LED 344 as an example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of an outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means disposed in the rotating body, and the rotation In a gaming machine including a body that is rotatably accommodated and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body through an open portion of the front surface, light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted from the rotating body. A gaming machine D1 in which light transmitted from an outer wall is reflected by the container and visually recognized by a player.

  Here, a rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a light emitting unit disposed inside the rotating body, 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably accommodated, and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013) -220215 gazette). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light of the light emitting means passes through the outer wall of the rotating body viewed from the open portion of the front surface of the container and is only directly recognized by the player. There was a problem that the light effect was not effectively demonstrated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player, the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is The player can visually recognize the light in a mode different from the case of directly viewing, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material and a transmission portion that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a material that can reflect light. And a reflecting part for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting part and the reflecting part at the time of rotation of the rotating body define an irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine D2 that is allowed to pass.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, on the outer wall of the rotating body, a transmission part that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A reflecting portion that reflects the inside of the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means And a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. Can be switched with the rotation. That is, two light emission forms can be formed by only one light emitting means. For example, the position of light visually recognized by the player is switched to at least two places without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, it is possible to effectively exhibit the light effect while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

  In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is disposed in a posture to irradiate light toward an open portion of the front surface of the container.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture to irradiate light toward the open portion of the front surface of the container, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be emitted. In a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, the light can be made visible to the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front surface of the container, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected In a form in which the light is reflected by the part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is made invisible from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front surface of the container. The player can visually recognize the rotating body. Thereby, along with the rotation of the rotating body, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be greatly different, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section, so that the apparent rotating body appears as the rotating body rotates. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is visible to the player around the rotating body, the light is The size of the visually recognized area can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body juxtaposed in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively A gaming machine D5, which is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged substantially parallel to the first rotating body. Since the rotator and the second rotator are each formed as a triangular prism having a triangular cross-section, the gap between the first rotator and the second rotator (with the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator) ( The facing distance can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion, then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is transmitted from the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When making a player visually recognize, the magnitude | size of the area | region where light is visually recognized can be increased / decreased with rotation of a rotary body, As a result, the effect effect of light can be exhibited effectively.

  In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the reflecting portion disposed on an inner surface of an outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surfaces of the substantially triangular cross section. A gaming machine D6, wherein the transmission portions are disposed on the respective outer walls forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed on the inner surface of the outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflection part is provided and the transmission part is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. In this case, light can be transmitted to the outside from the two outer surfaces (transmission portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different locations on the inner wall surface of the container so that the player can visually recognize the light, or the light transmitted from one transmitting portion can be directly viewed by the player and transmitted from the other transmitting portion. The reflected light can be reflected by the inner wall surface of the container and made visible to the player, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D6, the container is formed in a box-like body whose front surface is open, and a reflection portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is formed on the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body. A gaming machine D7, which is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the container is formed in a box-like body whose front surface is open, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body is made of a material that can reflect light. Since the reflection part to be formed is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the first rotator and the second rotator, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. Next, the player reflects the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D7, the container is capable of reflecting light to an inner wall surface on a side surface of the box-shaped body and facing in parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflecting portion formed of a simple material is provided.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7, the container is an inner wall surface on the side surface of the box-shaped body, and faces the rotation axis of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in parallel. Since the inner wall surface is provided with a reflecting portion made of a material that can reflect light, the light reflected by the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected by the inner wall surface on the side surface and visually recognized by the player. In addition, the light transmitted from the transmission part can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface of the container and made visible to the player. As a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

<Feature E group> (AQ mode)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that executes determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed on the display unit In a gaming machine having dynamic display means and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information. The identification information is configured to display a determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and a first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and the first rotating body. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a first gaming state and a first game state thereof Second game different from the game state If the first gaming state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the states and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is indicated by a combination of the identification information When the second game state is set, the setting is switched between the combination of identification information and the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display unit so as to show the determination result by the determination unit. A gaming machine E1 having switching setting means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of displaying a symbol by a combination of a plurality of symbols by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbol on a liquid crystal screen. It has been proposed (for example, JP 2008-23040 A). However, even in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that only a game in which a rotating body is always rotated to display a symbol is performed, and the player becomes bored. The gaming machine E1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display means capable of displaying the target, and when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, The identification information is configured to display the determination result of the determination means by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification information, and a first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface And a symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the first rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a first gaming state And the first game state is different from the first When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the gaming state and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is obtained by a combination of the identification information. When the second gaming state is set, the setting is switched between the combination of identification information and the combination of symbols displayed by the symbol display unit so as to indicate the determination result by the determination unit. And a switching setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine E1 has variable means for changing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a first position where the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visible and a second position where the first rotating body is less visible than the first position. When the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are located at the second position more than when the second gaming state is set. The game machine E2 is characterized by being easily variable.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the variable means based on the gaming state.

  Thereby, since it becomes possible to assume a game state with the position of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body is a specific combination, the display means has an effect executing means for executing a specific effect. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to execute an effect based on the combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. The symbol display means and the display means can associate the effects, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has drive transmission means for transmitting a driving force for rotating the first rotation and the second rotation body, and the drive transmission means includes the first rotation body and the second rotation body. A gaming machine E4, wherein the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the drive transmitting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, an acquisition unit that acquires information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition unit, and the acquisition unit acquired by the acquisition unit until at least the determination condition is satisfied A storage unit that stores information, a pre-determination unit that executes determination before the determination condition is satisfied, and the second gaming state for the information stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine comprising: determining means for determining a combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body based on a determination result of the prior determination means. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the combination of symbols displayed on the first rotating body and the second rotating body is determined based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the time until the determined symbol combination is displayed is secured. can do.

  Thus, for example, it is possible to provide an effect to the player using the time until display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the combination of symbols determined by the determination unit is determined, before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination unit is started And a pre-rotation means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, by a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are displayed until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination unit is started. Can be rotated by a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to reliably display the combination of symbols determined by the determining means.

<Feature F group> (Volume is displayed during the demonstration)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for executing the determination, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the sound based on the effect executed by the effect execution means are output. In the gaming machine having the sound output means, the operation means operable by the player, and the volume setting means for setting the volume based on the operation of the operation means, the effect executing means A gaming machine F1 comprising: a setting unit that sets an operation by the operation unit to be valid when the production period is a specific period.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes an audio output device and is capable of setting a sound volume for a game effect or the like (for example, JP-A-2005-237647). . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only in a state where the effect based on the game is not executed, and when the effect based on the game is executed, an unintended sound volume is output. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can play a game at a player's favorite volume.

  According to the gaming machine F1, it is executed by the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. A gaming machine having sound output means for outputting sound based on performance, operation means operable by a player, and volume setting means for setting sound volume based on operation of the operation means And setting means for setting the operation by the operation means to be effective in a specific period of the period during which the effect is being executed by the effect executing means. Thereby, volume adjustment can be performed appropriately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play with the player's favorite volume.

  In the gaming machine F1, effect determining means for determining the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining means, A gaming machine F2 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, a specific period can be set based on the content of the production, so the volume can be set within a range that does not impede the production, and the production effect is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress damage.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period in which an operation by the operation means is set to be effective when an effect is not executed for a predetermined period by the effect executing means. Machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to set the volume even when the production is not executed for a predetermined period by the production execution means. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a display unit that displays an effect mode by the effect execution unit and a setting mode that indicates that the specific period is set by the setting unit are displayed on the display unit. A gaming machine F4, comprising: setting mode display control means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the period during which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period during which the player can set the volume can be easily It can be grasped and the player can easily set the volume.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed by the effect execution unit for the predetermined period, the determination information notification unit that notifies the determination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting unit. A gaming machine F5 characterized by having the following.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed for a predetermined time by the effect executing means, the set volume is notified, so that the player It is possible to easily determine whether or not the sound volume should be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the game machine has a prohibiting unit that prohibits the setting unit from setting the operation unit to be effective based on the determination result determined by the determination unit. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, it is prohibited to set the operation means to be effective. The determination result of the determination means can be grasped by the operation for setting the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that dynamically displays identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information is specific to the determination It is composed of at least a first symbol indicating a result and a second symbol indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result, and the setting mode displays the second symbol in a variable manner. A gaming machine F7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect execution means, and at least the first design indicating the specific determination result is different from the specific determination result. Among the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating the second symbol, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereby, the 2nd design which shows that it is a judgment result different from a specific judgment result can be used for setting of a volume. Therefore, it is possible to effectively use the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when the specific period is set, the game machine has a luminance variable unit that varies the luminance of the display unit based on an operation of the operation unit. A gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when a specific period is set, the luminance of the display unit is varied by the luminance varying unit based on the operation of the operating unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play with the player's favorite brightness.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, acquisition means for acquiring information used for determination of the determination condition based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and acquisition by the acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied A storage unit that stores the information; a pre-determination unit that determines the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied; and a determination result by the pre-determination unit. Determination means for determining establishment, and the setting means, when the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least the specific period determined by the prior determination means Until the performance corresponding to is executed, the operation of the operation means is set to be effective.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are produced. That is, information used for determination by the determination unit is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The storage means stores the acquired information until at least a determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is determined by prior determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting unit effectively sets the operation of the operation unit until an effect corresponding to the information determined by the prior determination unit is executed.

  Thus, the period from when the information is determined by the prior determination means to when the effect corresponding to the information is executed can be set as a period during which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a favorite sound volume corresponding to the effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

<Feature group G> (Fish school customization settings)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a dynamic display unit that displays the identification information displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a target display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, by a player's operation Operation means capable of inputting game information, storage means capable of storing game information input by the operation means, and the determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed Prior display means for displaying the prior information based on the determination result on the display means, and prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the determination result , Setting means for setting a ratio selected between the case where the determination result is a specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result for the specific prior information determined by the prior information determination means And a ratio determining means for determining a ratio set by the setting means based on the game information stored in the storage means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game lottery is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). However, with this type of pachinko machine, it is difficult to provide a game machine that matches the player's preference because the expectation level of the production cannot be set according to the player's individual preference. was there. The gaming machine G1 has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that matches the player's preference.

  According to the gaming machine G1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that executes determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and the identification displayed on the display unit A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information; and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed. An operation means capable of inputting game information by a user's operation, a storage means capable of storing game information input by the operation means, and a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, Pre-display means for displaying the pre-information based on the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and pre-information determination for determining the content of the pre-information displayed by the pre-display means based on the determination result And a setting means for setting a probability that the specific prior information that can be determined is determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the prior information determination means, and the setting means Probability determining means for determining the probability set by the above-mentioned game information stored in the storage means. Thereby, the expectation degree which prior information shows can be varied according to a player's liking. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that matches the player's preference.

  In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 indicates that the specific prior information notifies a player of an expectation level indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the expectation degree indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific prior information. Therefore, according to the player's preference There is an effect that the production can be set in more detail.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the game information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation, so that the game machine G3 produces more details according to the player's preference. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the counter unit capable of repeatedly updating the counter value within a predetermined range, and the acquisition of the counter value counted by the counter unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition And the specific prior information is determined in the range of the counter value when the determination result is a specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result, respectively. A value is set, and the prior information determination means is the specific prior information when the counter value acquired by the acquisition means is one of the determination values set in the specific prior information. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the game machine G4 is determined.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the counter value is repeatedly updated within a predetermined range by the counter means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the counter value counted by the counter unit is acquired by the acquiring unit. The specific prior information is acquired by the acquisition unit with the determination value set in the range of the counter value in each of the case where the determination result is the specific determination result and the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific advance information, the specific advance information is determined. Thereby, there exists an effect that control can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G4, the ratio setting means sets a range of the determination value to be set based on the gaming information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, since the range of the determination value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, there is an effect that the determination value can be set more easily.

<Feature H group> (control to divide the region of the touch detection position)
An effect execution means for executing an effect, a detection means capable of detecting a player's operation operation in a non-contact manner, and when the operation action is detected by the detection means, the effect execution means performs a specific effect. In the gaming machine having the effect varying means for executing the second detection means, the detection means includes a first detection area capable of detecting the operation action and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that can be changed to a prohibition position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection area and a permission position that allows the shared detection area to be formed, and Variable control means for variably controlling a variable member between the prohibition position and the permission position; and discrimination means for discriminating which of the first detection area and the second detection area is detected by the detection means; When the variable member is varied at the prohibited position, the effect varying means determines the determination result detected by either the first detection area or the second detection area by the determination means. Based on the above, the gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it can be changed to the corresponding specific production.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball to the start port A game lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a means of changing the production by the player's operation, a gaming machine that arranges a touch sensor that can be input by the player with a finger or the like, and the player performs a touch operation to switch the production etc. It has been proposed (for example, JP 2009-219617 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a more suitable game using an input means such as a touch sensor has been demanded. It is an object to provide a suitable gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the operation is detected by the effect executing means for executing the effect, the detecting means capable of detecting the player, and the detecting means, a specific effect is provided by the effect executing means. Effect variable means to be executed, wherein the detection means has at least a first detection area in which a player can be detected and a second detection area including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. And a variable member that can be changed to a prohibition position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection area and a permission position that permits the formation of the shared detection area, and the variable member is prohibited from being formed. Variable control means for variably controlling the position and the permitted position, and determination means for determining whether the first detection area or the second detection area is detected by the detection means. The means If it is variable in position on the basis of the discrimination result by the discriminating means, but for varying the specific effect that the corresponding.

  Accordingly, since the variable member prohibits the formation of the shared detection region, the region detected by the detection unit can be varied by the operation of the variable member, and the detection unit can be used functionally. . Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable gaming machine can be provided.

  The gaming machine H1 has display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, the variable member is arranged to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the detection means A gaming machine H2 having the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the variable member is varied on the front side of the display means, so that it is possible to notify the player of the detection area at the position of the variable member, making it easier to understand. A game can be performed. Furthermore, the player can select the effects displayed on the display means, and there is an effect that various effects can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H2, when the variable member is at the permission position, the effect execution means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area, and when the variable member is at the prohibited position. The game machine H3 is characterized in that a second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to each of the first detection area and the second detection area.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when in the permitted position, and the first detection area and the second detection area when in the prohibited position. Since each of the second effects is displayed, the effective detection area can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and there is an effect that an effect fused with the effect displayed on the display means can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode in which the player selects either the display mode displayed in the first detection area or the display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the player can select and operate according to the selection display mode, and can be more involved in the game and can improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means has at least first detection means for setting a first detection area and second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means includes a first detection means for setting the first detection area and a second detection means for setting the second detection area. Therefore, there is an effect that the first detection region and the second detection region can be detected independently.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection means targets an output unit capable of outputting infrared rays to the first detection region and the second detection region, and the infrared rays output from the output unit are targets. A gaming machine H6 having at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared rays reflected by an object.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection area and the second detection area are detected by infrared rays. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress malfunctions.

<Characteristic group I> (Increase in swing width of swinging object, suppression control)
A swing member configured to be swingable, swing means for swinging the swing member by operating in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the swing member; A state discriminating unit capable of discriminating whether the member is moving in the first direction or the second direction, and a swing for controlling the swinging unit based on a determination result by the state discriminating unit A gaming machine I1 having control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball to the start port A game lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In an effect indicating a lottery of a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable accessory provided on a game board is moved to execute a notice effect that informs a player in advance of information related to the result of determination of success / failure (for example, JP, 2010-094348, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there are restrictions on the size of the game board surface, the power that can be used, and the like, and the number of movable means such as a motor for moving the movable accessory is limited and can be moved. There is a problem that the operation is restricted, the production is restricted, and the fun of the game is lowered. The present gaming machine has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of gaming.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the swing member configured to be swingable, and the swing that swings by operating the effect member in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. Based on the determination result by the state determination means and the state determination means capable of determining in which direction of the first direction and the second direction the rotation member is moved. Swing control means for controlling the means.

  Thereby, the swing of the swing member can be easily controlled. Therefore, the game control process can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine I1, a state setting unit capable of setting a first state in which the swinging member is swung and a second state in which the swinging of the swinging member is suppressed, and the state setting unit can set the first state. And a means for controlling the swinging means by the swing control means to operate the swinging member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means based on the setting of one state. A gaming machine I2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swinging member is set by the state setting means, the direction is the same as the direction determined by the state determination means. Since the swing member is controlled by the swing control means to operate the swing member, there is an effect that the swing of the swing member can be continued.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the swing member includes a displaceable displacement member and a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable with the displaceable member, and the displaceable members are displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3, comprising a pair of possible arm members, wherein the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the first member and the displacement member are relatively displaced, the displacement width of the swing member can be further increased, and the production can be dynamically performed. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swinging means. Is rotated around the other end.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3, the other end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable is rotatably supported and provided from the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated around the other end by the driving force, there is an effect that the swinging can be continued and the production can be performed for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine I3 or I4, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is disposed, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member and sliding on the other of the arm member or the first member. A pin portion formed so as to be slidable along the groove is disposed, and the sliding groove has at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove in a state where the arm member is disposed at the reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin portion and the pin portion, there is an effect that friction when swinging can be reduced and damping of swinging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determination unit includes an acceleration sensor disposed on the swing member, and determines the state of the swing member based on information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state of the swing member is determined by the state determination unit based on information output from the acceleration sensor disposed on the swing member. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing control can be executed in accordance with the state of the swing member.

<Feature J group> (Pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. And the effect content determination means for determining the effect content, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotator, respectively, and the figure is combined with the effect content determined by the effect content determination means. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, and each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first position at which the player can easily see the figure, and a first position thereof. The rotation control means is configured to be variable to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and the rotation control means displays the combination of the figures indicating the contents of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. 2nd place And rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount, respectively, and then changing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to the first position, respectively. A gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball to the start port A game lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect showing a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel showing a plurality of symbols is rotated a plurality of times, and a lottery result is notified by a combination of symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2004). -160759). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (the rotation until the symbol to be stopped is positioned in front is determined by the size of the reel, the number of symbols to be displayed, etc. (Time) becomes longer and the time until the lottery result is displayed becomes longer, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game fun.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the driving means, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the first rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmission means and having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Rotation body and second rotator, effect content determining means for determining effect content, and the content of effect determined by the effect content determining means by controlling rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator respectively. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination indicating the first rotation body and the second rotation body. It is configured to be variable to one position and a second position where it is harder to visually recognize the figure than the first position, and the rotation control means is a combination of the figures indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means Show When the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to a predetermined amount at the second position, respectively, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the first position, respectively. It is variable.

  Thereby, an arbitrary figure can be quickly displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the graphic is displayed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the rotation control means can control the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. And whether to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction or the second direction, respectively, based on the contents of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. A gaming machine J2 having rotation direction determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are determined between the first direction and the second direction based on the content of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. Since the rotation direction determining means determines which to rotate, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the position corresponding to the effect, and the rotation time can be shortened. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the transmission means at different rotation ratios. Since the second rotating body can be rotated with respect to the body at different periods, there is an effect that the combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be displayed in various ways efficiently.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, A gaming machine K1 that is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, A gaming machine K3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down is provided with a start opening through which a game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-219617).
However, in this type of pachinko machine, a more suitable game has been demanded.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and aims to provide a more suitable game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes an effect execution means for executing an effect, a detection means capable of detecting a player's operation without contact, and the operation by the detection means. An effect variable means for causing the effect executing means to execute a specific effect when an action is detected, and the detecting means detects a first detection area capable of detecting the operation action and the first detection area. At least a second detection area including a shared detection area, and a prohibited position for prohibiting the formation of the shared detection area, and an allowed position for allowing the shared detection area to be formed. A variable member that can be changed to variable, a variable control means that variably controls the variable member to the prohibition position and the permission position, and the detection by either the first detection area or the second detection area Detected by means Determining means for determining whether the variable member is variable at the prohibited position, and the effect changing means is configured to determine the first detection area and the second detection area by the determining means. Based on the discrimination result detected by either of the above, the corresponding specific effects are varied.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and has display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, and the variable member is variable on the front side of the display area of the display means. The detection means has the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein, when the variable member is in the permitted position, the effect executing means provides the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area. And when the variable member is in the prohibited position, a second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to each of the first detection area and the second detection area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operation operation is detected by the effect execution means for executing the effect, the detection means capable of detecting the operation operation of the player in a non-contact manner, and the detection means. An effect changing means for causing the effect executing means to execute a specific effect, and the detecting means includes a first detection area in which the operation operation can be detected and a part of the first detection area. At least a second detection area including a certain shared detection area, and variable between a prohibited position where the shared detection area is prohibited and a permitted position where the shared detection area is allowed to be formed. A variable member that can be detected, a variable control unit that variably controls the variable member to the prohibition position and the permission position, and any one of the first detection region and the second detection region that is detected by the detection unit. Determine And when the variable member is changed to the prohibited position, the effect changing means is either the first detection area or the second detection area by the determination means. On the other hand, based on the detected discrimination results, the corresponding specific effects are varied. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable game can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect, the variable member is arranged to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the detection means is the display The first detection area and the second detection area are provided on the front side of the display area of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier to understand can be performed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect execution means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is at the permission position, and when the variable member is at the prohibited position, A second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to each of the first detection area and the second detection area. Therefore, there is an effect that the effective detection area can be easily informed to the player.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
600 Left / right sensor device (detection means)
400 Central floating unit (variable member)
S1 irradiation area (first detection area)
S2 irradiation area (second detection area)
S1315 Production variable means S2003 Variable control means S2005 A part of discrimination means

Claims (3)

Production execution means for performing production,
A detecting means capable of detecting a player's operation without contact;
In a gaming machine having an effect variable means for executing a specific effect by the effect executing means when the operation operation is detected by the detecting means,
The detection means includes at least a first detection region capable of detecting the operation action and a second detection region including a shared detection region that is a part of the first detection region,
A variable member that can be changed to a prohibition position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permission position that permits the formation of the shared detection region;
Variable control means for variably controlling the variable member between the prohibited position and the permitted position;
Determining means for determining which of the first detection area and the second detection area is detected by the detection means;
When the variable member is varied at the prohibited position, the effect varying means is based on a determination result detected by either the first detection area or the second detection area by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is variable to the corresponding specific production. A display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect;
The variable member is arranged to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the detection means has the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.   The production execution means displays the first production at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is at the permission position, and the first production when the variable member is at the prohibited position. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second effect is displayed at a position corresponding to each of the detection area and the second detection area.

Images